Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf

203 excerpts.

Manualslib.com - The Global Manuals Library

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 1 · Applies to: 453

Manuals / Brands / SMART Manuals / Automobile / fortwo coupe / Owner's manual / PDF SMART FORTWO COUPÉ OWNER'S MANUAL Table of Contents Table of Contents Protection of the environment smart genuine parts Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Vehicle equipment Operating safety QR codes for rescue card Data stored in the vehicle Copyright information

Cockpit

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 2 · Applies to: 453

Multifunction steering wheel Centre console with drawer Overhead control panel Door control panel Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display Occupant safety Children in the vehicle Pets in the vehicle Driving safely Opening the door Correct driver's seat position Adjusting the seats Adjusting the steering wheel Adjusting the mirrors Running-in a new vehicle Starting the engine Pulling away Automatic start/stop system Manual transmission Automatic transmission Using the turn signals Driving economically Braking correctly Driving on wet roads Winter driving Lane Keeping Assist Cruise control and limiter Refuelling

Switching on the lighting

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 3 · Applies to: 453

Adjusting the lighting Using the interior lighting Using the windscreen wipers Folding the sun visor to the side Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside Understanding the reversing function Opening and closing the windows Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) Operating the climate control system Switching the seat heating on and off Using the accessories Parking Using the parking aid Using the reversing camera Locking the vehicle Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system Overview of the on-board computer Calling up displays Setting values Operating and setting the smart Audio-System Listening to the radio Using a mobile phone Operating external data storage media Operating and setting up the smart Media-System Listening to the radio Using a mobile phone Connecting and operating external data storage media

Viewing images

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 4 · Applies to: 453

Video playback Using the navigation system Managing apps Stowing small objects Stowing luggage and large objects Using the boot separator Useful information Removing/fitting the subwoofer Opening and closing the engine compartment cover Opening and closing the service cover Checking service products and topping up Checking wheels and tyres Changing a wheel Using the tyre pressure monitor Checking the tyre pressures Using winter tyres Using snow chains Changing the window wiper blades Cleaning the vehicle Observing service due dates Parking up the vehicle Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown Removing the first-aid kit Removing the fire extinguisher Removing the vehicle tool tray Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit Jump-starting and charging the battery Towing and tow-starting the vehicle

Manually releasing the selector lever lock

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 5 · Applies to: 453

Replacing the bulbs Changing fuses Replacing the key battery Opening a door with the emergency release Locking the doors in an emergency Notes on display messages Locking and unlocking Visibility, occupants, airbags Engine, brakes, transmission Driving safety systems Driver assistance systems Battery, lights, heating smart Audio-System and smart Media-System Obtaining technical data Reading out vehicle data Service products Bulb types Fuse allocation Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) Other ManualsLib Projects

>> Owner's Manual

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 6 · Applies to: 453

smart fortwo coupé and smart fortwo cabrio

Symbols in the Owner's Manual

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 7 · Applies to: 453

The following symbols are used in this Own- er's Manual: G WARNING Warning notes make you aware of dangers which could pose a threat to your health or life, or to the health and life of others. H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal. ! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle. i These symbols indicate useful instruc- tions or further information that could be helpful to you. X Instructions that must be followed. X Several consecutive symbols indicate an instruction with several consecutive steps. (Y page) Further information on a topic YY A warning or an instruction that is con- tinued on the next page. Display text: Display text in the instru- ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys- tem or the smart Media-System.

About this Owner's Manual

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 8 · Applies to: 453

Before you first drive off, read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Disre- garding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or personal injury. This Owner's Manual provides information on the most important functions of your vehicle. The equipment or model designation of your vehicle may vary according to: RModel ROrder RCountry variant RAvailability The illustrations in this manual show a left- hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the layout of components and con- trols differs accordingly. smart is constantly updating its vehicles to the state of the art. smart therefore reserves the right to intro- duce changes in the following areas: RDesign REquipment RTechnical features Therefore, the description may differ from your vehicle in some cases. Integral parts of the vehicle include: ROwner's Manual RService Booklet REquipment-dependent Supplements These documents should be kept in the vehi- cle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all documents on to the new owner. Your Owner's Manuals: Digital on the Internet The Owner's Manual on the Internet provides you with convenient access to all the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system. It also offers helpful animations, exciting background information and a wide variety of search options. Digital as an app Using the smart guides app, you can call up all of the information relevant to your vehicle and multimedia system online on your phone or as a download regardless of the status of your network connection. Available for smartphones or tablets. QR codes for the smart guides app. Apple® iOS Android™ Please note that the smart guides app may not currently be available in your country. 4535848905 É4535848905AËÍ

Index .........................................................

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 9 · Applies to: 453

4 Introduction ........................................... 18 Protection of the environment ............. 18 smart genuine parts .............................. 18 Warranty for the smart Audio-Sys- tem and smart Media-System .............. 19 Vehicle equipment ................................. 19 Operating safety .................................... 19 QR codes for rescue card ....................... 22 Data stored in the vehicle .................... 22 Copyright information .......................... 23 At a glance .............................................. 24 Cockpit .................................................... 24 Multifunction steering wheel .............. 25 Centre console with drawer .................. 26 Overhead control panel ......................... 27 Door control panel ................................. 28 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display ......................... 29 Safety ...................................................... 30 Occupant safety ..................................... 30 Children in the vehicle ......................... 36 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 45 Driving safely ........................................ 46 Entering and setting up ........................ 49 Opening the door ................................... 49 Correct driver's seat position ............... 49 Adjusting the seats ............................... 49 Adjusting the steering wheel ............... 51 Adjusting the mirrors ............................ 51 Driving ..................................................... 53 Running-in a new vehicle .................... 53 Starting the engine ............................... 53 Pulling away .......................................... 54 Automatic start/stop system ................ 56 Manual transmission ............................ 57 Automatic transmission ........................ 57 Using the turn signals .......................... 60 Driving economically ............................ 60 Braking correctly ................................... 64 Driving on wet roads ............................. 64 Winter driving ........................................ 65 Lane Keeping Assist .............................. 65 Cruise control and limiter .................... 66 Refuelling ............................................... 67 Ensuring good visibility ........................ 70 Switching on the lighting ..................... 70 Adjusting the lighting .......................... 71 Using the interior lighting ................... 72 Using the windscreen wipers ............... 72 Folding the sun visor to the side ......... 74 Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior .................................................... 75 Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside ....................................... 75 Understanding the reversing func- tion .......................................................... 76 Opening and closing the windows ....... 76 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) ..................................................... 77 Operating the climate control sys- tem ........................................................... 80 Switching the seat heating on and off ............................................................. 83 Using the accessories ........................... 83 Parking and getting out ........................ 85 Parking .................................................... 85 Using the parking aid ........................... 85 Using the reversing camera ................. 86 Locking the vehicle ............................... 87 Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system ................................ 88 Operating the on-board computer ....... 89 Overview of the on-board computer ... 89 Calling up displays ............................... 90 Setting values ........................................ 92 Using the smart Audio-System ............. 94 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System ......................................... 94 2 Contents

Listening to the radio ...........................

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 10 · Applies to: 453

96 Using a mobile phone ............................ 98 Operating external data storage media ..................................................... 100 Using the smart Media-System .......... 102 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System ...................................... 102 Listening to the radio .......................... 106 Using a mobile phone .......................... 108 Connecting and operating external data storage media .............................. 111 Viewing images .................................... 112 Video playback ..................................... 113 Using the navigation system ............. 113 Managing apps ..................................... 122 Loading and stowing ............................ 124 Stowing small objects ......................... 124 Stowing luggage and large objects ... 125 Using the boot separator .................... 127 Maintenance and care .......................... 129 Useful information ............................... 129 Removing/fitting the subwoofer ........ 129 Opening and closing the engine compartment cover .............................. 129 Opening and closing the service cover ...................................................... 130 Checking service products and top- ping up .................................................. 131 Checking wheels and tyres ................. 134 Changing a wheel ................................ 135 Using the tyre pressure monitor ....... 139 Checking the tyre pressures .............. 140 Using winter tyres ............................... 141 Using snow chains ............................... 141 Changing the window wiper blades .. 141 Cleaning the vehicle ............................ 143 Observing service due dates .............. 147 Parking up the vehicle ........................ 147 Dealing with accidents and break- downs .................................................... 148 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown ............... 148 Removing the first-aid kit .................. 149 Removing the fire extinguisher ......... 149 Removing the vehicle tool tray .......... 149 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit .. 150 Jump-starting and charging the battery .................................................. 152 Towing and tow-starting the vehi- cle .......................................................... 155 Manually releasing the selector lever lock .............................................. 158 Replacing the bulbs ............................ 158 Changing fuses ..................................... 161 Replacing the key battery .................. 162 Opening a door with the emergency release ................................................... 163 Locking the doors in an emergency .. 163 Practical advice .................................... 165 Notes on display messages ................ 165 Locking and unlocking ........................ 165 Visibility, occupants, airbags ............ 167 Engine, brakes, transmission ............. 169 Driving safety systems ....................... 176 Driver assistance systems .................. 182 Battery, lights, heating ....................... 184 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System ...................................... 186 Technical data ...................................... 188 Obtaining technical data .................... 188 Reading out vehicle data .................... 188 Service products .................................. 190 Bulb types ............................................. 190 Fuse allocation ..................................... 190 Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors ................................ 192 Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) ....... 192 Contents 3

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 11 · Applies to: 453

A ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Display message ............................ 176 Function/notes ................................. 46 Warning lamp (yellow) .................. 176 Adjusting the headlamp range ............. 71 Air conditioning General notes ................................... 80 Air conditioning system Demisting the windscreen .............. 81 Air distribution Setting (air-conditioning sys- tem) ................................................... 80 Setting (automatic climate con- trol) .................................................... 81 Air pressure see Tyre pressure Air vents Important safety notes ................... 82 Setting ............................................... 82 Air vents see Air vents Air-conditioning system Activating/deactivating air- recirculation mode .......................... 80 Air distribution ................................ 80 Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion .................................................... 81 Demisting the rear window ............ 81 Increasing or decreasing the blower speed .................................... 80 Setting the temperature ................. 80 Switching on/off .............................. 80 Windows misted up ......................... 81 Air-recirculation mode Activating/deactivating (air- conditioning system) ...................... 80 Switching on/off (automatic climate control) ................................ 82 Airbag Enabling and disabling the passenger airbag* ........................... 39 Installation locations ...................... 33 Limited protection ........................... 34 Overview ........................................... 33 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 35 Airbags Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ........................................ 33 Kneebag ............................................ 33 Protection provided ......................... 34 Sidebag ............................................. 33 Triggering ........................................ 31 Alarm Anti-theft alarm system ................. 88 Switching off .................................... 88 Ambient lighting Setting the brightness .................... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 92 Animals see Pets in the vehicle Anti-lock Braking System see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft alarm system Priming/deactivating ...................... 88 Switching off the alarm .................. 88 Aquaplaning ........................................... 64 Ashtray .................................................... 83 Audio-System Connecting a mobile phone ............ 98 Connecting a USB device ............... 100 Connecting Bluetooth® audio devices ............................................ 101 Connecting external audio equipment (AUX) ............................ 100 Operating .......................................... 94 Operating the radio ......................... 96 Overview ........................................... 94 Selecting a track ............................ 100 System settings ............................... 95 Troubleshooting ............................. 186 Volume/sound settings ................... 96 Warranty ........................................... 19 Authorised workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic climate control Cooling with air dehumidifica- tion .................................................... 82 Demisting the rear window ............ 82 Demisting the windscreen .............. 82 Increasing or decreasing the blower speed .................................... 81 4 Index

Setting air distribution ..................

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 12 · Applies to: 453

81 Setting the temperature ................. 81 Switching air-recirculation mode on/off ....................................... 82 Switching on/off .............................. 81 Windows misted up ......................... 82 Automatic engine switch-off (auto- matic start/stop system) ....................... 56 Automatic headlamp mode .................... 70 Automatic start/stop system Activating/deactivating ................. 56 General information ........................ 56 Automatic transmission Display message ............................ 174 Drive programs ................................ 58 Emergency running mode ............. 175 Engaging neutral ............................. 58 Engaging reverse gear .................... 58 Engaging the park position ............ 58 Gearshift paddles ............................ 60 Gearshift recommendation ............. 61 Kickdown .......................................... 58 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with colour display) ............ 174 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 174 Manual shifting ............................... 59 Manually releasing the selector lever lock ........................................ 158 Pulling away .................................... 54 Starting the engine ......................... 53 Transmission positions .................. 57 Automatic transmission emergency running mode ....................................... 175 AUX jack Audio-System ................................... 94 Media-System ................................ 102 B Battery (key) Important safety notes ................. 162 Replacing ........................................ 162 Battery (vehicle) Charging ......................................... 152 Display message ............................ 184 Important safety notes ................. 152 Jump starting ................................. 154 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 184 Belt tensioner Activation ......................................... 31 Blower speed Increasing or decreasing (air- conditioning system) ...................... 80 Increasing or decreasing (auto- matic climate control) ..................... 81 Bonnet (front) see Service cover Boot see Tailgate Boot separator ...................................... 127 Fitting ............................................. 127 Removing ........................................ 128 Brake EBD ..................................................... 48 Brake fluid Display message ............................ 172 Brake force distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Brake lamp Replacing bulbs ............................. 159 Brake lamps Display message ............................ 184 Brakes ABS ..................................................... 46 Driving tips ...................................... 64 Important safety notes ................... 64 Parking brake ................................... 55 Warning lamp ................................. 172 Breakdown see Flat tyre see Towing away/tow-starting C Car see Vehicle Car wash (care) ..................................... 143 Care Automatic car wash ....................... 143 Carpets ............................................ 146 Cleaning the interior ..................... 145 Display ............................................ 145 Exhaust pipe ................................... 144 Index 5

Exterior ........................................... 145

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 13 · Applies to: 453

Exterior lighting ............................ 145 Gear or selector lever .................... 145 High-pressure cleaner .................. 143 Interior ............................................ 145 Notes ........................................ 143, 145 Paint ................................................ 145 Plastic trim ..................................... 146 Reversing camera .......................... 144 Roof lining .............................. 145, 146 Seat belt .......................................... 146 Seat cover ....................................... 146 Sensors ............................................ 144 Soft-top system ............................. 145 Steering wheel ............................... 145 Washing by hand ........................... 143 Wheels ............................................. 144 Windows .......................................... 144 Wiper blades ................................... 145 Central locking Automatic locking ............................ 75 Locking/unlocking (key) ................. 87 Centre console Overview ........................................... 26 Changing bulbs Tail lamps ....................................... 159 Changing the route Navigation ...................................... 117 Child restraint system Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ............................ 42 Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ............................................. 43 Child seat Forward-facing restraint sys- tem ..................................................... 41 i-Size ................................................. 37 ISOFIX ................................................ 37 On the front-passenger seat .......... 40 Rearward-facing restraint sys- tem ..................................................... 41 Recommendations ............................ 44 Suitability of the seats for i- Size child restraint systems .......... 44 Suitable positions ............................ 41 Top Tether ........................................ 38 Children Restraint systems ............................ 36 Cigarette lighter ..................................... 83 Climate control Air conditioning ............................... 80 Automatic air conditioning ............ 81 Setting the air vents ....................... 82 Clock Setting the time (Media-Sys- tem) ................................................. 104 Cockpit Overview ........................................... 24 Controlling speed see Cruise control Coolant Checking coolant level and top- ping up ............................................ 133 Display message ............................ 171 Important safety notes ................. 134 Temperature gauge ......................... 91 Cooling see Climate control Cooling with air dehumidification Air-conditioning system ................ 81 Automatic climate control .............. 82 Copyright ................................................ 23 Cornering light function ........................ 71 Cover (front) see Service cover Crosswind Assist ..................................... 47 Cruise control Activating ......................................... 66 Buttons .............................................. 66 Calling up the speed last stored .... 67 Cancelling cruise control ................ 67 Deactivating ..................................... 67 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 183 Display message (monochrome display) ........................................... 183 Function/notes ................................. 66 General notes ................................... 66 Important safety notes ................... 66 Increasing/decreasing the speed ................................................. 67 Storing and maintaining cur- rent speed ......................................... 67 6 Index

Cup holder

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 14 · Applies to: 453

Centre console ................................ 124 Important safety notes ................. 124 Cup holder see Cup holder D DAB radio (Digital Audio Broadcast- ing) Introduction ..................................... 97 Dashboard Additional instruments .................. 61 Dashboard clock ..................................... 61 Data see Technical data Daytime driving lights ........................... 70 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declarations of conformity .................... 20 Diagnostics connection .......................... 21 Digital radio ............................................ 97 Audio-System ................................... 96 Media-System ................................ 106 Digital speedometer Displaying ........................................ 92 Dipped-beam headlamps Driving abroad ................................. 71 Replacing bulbs ............................. 159 Switching on/off .............................. 70 Display Colour ................................................ 90 Monochrome ..................................... 89 Display (cleaning instructions) .......... 145 Display messages General information ...................... 165 Distance recorder Monochrome display ....................... 90 Distance recorder see Trip meter Distance warning function Display message ............................ 182 Function/notes ................................. 46 Warning lamp ................................. 182 Door Automatic locking (switch) ............ 75 Central locking/unlocking (key) .... 87 Control panel .................................... 28 Display message ............................ 166 Emergency locking ........................ 163 Emergency unlocking ................... 163 Opening (from the inside) ............... 75 Double lock function .............................. 75 Driver's door see Door Driver's seat see Seats Driving abroad Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 71 Driving safety system EBD (electronic brake force dis- tribution) .......................................... 48 Driving safety systems ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 46 Distance warning function ............. 46 ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro- gram) ................................................. 47 ETS (Electronic Traction Sys- tem) ................................................... 47 Important safety guidelines .......... 46 Driving systems Cruise control ................................... 66 Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 65 Speed limiter .................................... 66 Driving tips Aquaplaning ..................................... 64 Brakes ................................................ 64 Downhill gradient ............................ 64 Driving in winter ............................. 65 Driving on flooded roads ................ 64 Driving on wet roads ....................... 64 Energy consumption ....................... 60 General .............................................. 60 Icy road surfaces ............................. 65 Limited braking efficiency on salted roads ...................................... 64 Pulling away .................................... 54 Running-in tips ............................... 53 Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 71 Wet road surface .............................. 64 E EBD (electronic brake force distri- bution) Function/notes ................................. 48 Index 7

Indicator lamp ................................ 176

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 15 · Applies to: 453

eco score Calling up ......................................... 63 Comparing the trip .......................... 63 Evaluating the current trip ............ 63 Function/notes ................................. 62 Resetting data .................................. 63 Saving the trip ................................. 63 eco score display Colour display .................................. 62 Monochrome display ....................... 62 Electromagnetic compatibility Declaration of conformity ............... 21 Electronic Brake-force Distribution see EBD (electronic brake force distribution) Electronic Traction System see ETS (Electronic Traction System) Emergency release Driver's door ................................... 163 Emergency unlocking Vehicle ............................................ 163 Engine Automatic start/stop system .......... 56 Display message ............................ 170 Jump-starting ............................... 152 Running irregularly ...................... 169 Starting problems .......................... 169 Starting the engine with the key .. 53 Stopping ............................................ 85 Tow-starting (vehicle) .................. 157 Warning lamp (engine diagnos- tics) .................................................. 170 Engine compartment cover ................. 129 Engine electronics Notes ................................................. 19 Problem (fault) ............................... 169 Engine oil Checking the oil level .................... 132 Display message ............................ 171 Notes about oil grades .................. 190 Topping up ..................................... 133 Warning lamp ................................. 171 Entering a destination Navigation ...................................... 114 Environmental protection Returning an end-of-life vehi- cle ...................................................... 18 EPG Displaying ........................................ 98 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Crosswind Assist .............................. 47 Display message ............................ 177 General notes ................................... 47 Important safety guidelines .......... 47 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 177 ETS (Electronic Traction System) ......... 47 Exhaust pipe Cleaning .......................................... 144 Exterior lighting Cleaning .......................................... 145 see Lights Exterior mirrors Adjusting .......................................... 52 Out of position (troubleshoot- ing) .................................................. 167 External audio equipment (AUX) Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 100 External data carriers Connecting (Audio-System) ........... 94 Connection (Media-System) ......... 111 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 100 Operation (Media-System) ........... 111 F Favourites Creating (Media-System) .............. 105 Managing (Media-System) ........... 105 Fire extinguisher .................................. 149 First-aid kit .......................................... 149 Fitting a wheel Fitting a wheel ............................... 138 Preparing the vehicle .................... 136 Raising the vehicle ........................ 137 Removing a wheel .......................... 137 Securing the vehicle against rolling away ................................... 148 Flat tyre Preparing the vehicle .................... 148 TIREFIT kit ...................................... 150 Floormat .................................................. 84 Foglamps Switching on/off .............................. 71 Fording On flooded roads .............................. 64 8 Index

Frequencies

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 16 · Applies to: 453

Mobile phone .................................. 192 Two-way radio ............................... 192 Front airbag ............................................ 33 Front cover see Service cover Front windscreen see Windscreen Front-passenger front airbag deac- tivation system PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps ................................................. 35 Status indicator ............................... 35 Frontal area cover see Service cover Fuel Additives ........................................... 67 Displaying the current con- sumption ........................................... 90 Displaying the current con- sumption (colour display) .............. 91 Driving tips ...................................... 60 E10 ..................................................... 67 Grade (petrol) ................................... 67 Important safety notes ................... 67 Problem (malfunction) .................. 170 Refuelling ......................................... 67 Fuel filler flap Opening/closing ............................... 68 Problem (malfunction) .................. 166 Fuel gauge ............................................... 89 Fuel level Gauge ................................................ 89 Fuses Allocation chart ............................. 190 Before changing ............................. 161 Dashboard fuse box ....................... 161 Important safety notes ................. 161 Opening the fuse box ..................... 161 G Gear or selector lever (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 145 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts .............. 18 Glove compartment .............................. 124 H Handbrake see Parking brake Hands-free system see Mobile phone Hazard warning lamps ......................... 148 Headlamp flasher ................................... 71 Headlamps see Automatic headlamp mode Heating see Climate control Hill start assist ....................................... 55 I i‑Size child seat securing systems ....... 37 Ice warning Warning lamp (colour display) .... 184 Warning lamp (monochrome display) ........................................... 184 Ignition lock see Key positions Immobiliser ....................................... 85, 88 Indicator and warning lamp Restraint system ............................ 168 Indicator and warning lamps Coolant ............................................ 171 Engine diagnostics ........................ 170 Indicator lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Overview ........................................... 29 Warning and indicator lamps ........ 29 Instrument cluster lighting Setting ............................................... 92 Intellitext™ Switching on .................................... 98 Interior lighting ............................... 51, 72 Changing bulbs .............................. 161 Setting the ambient lighting ......... 92 Switching on/off .............................. 72 Intermittent wipe ................................... 73 ISOFIX child seat securing system ....... 37 J Jack Using ............................................... 137 Index 9

Jump start (engine)

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 17 · Applies to: 453

see Jump starting (engine) Jump starting (engine) ........................ 152 K Key Changing the battery .................... 162 Loss .................................................. 165 Position in the ignition lock .......... 53 Problem (malfunction) .................. 165 Starting the engine ......................... 53 Key positions (ignition lock) ................. 53 Kickdown ................................................. 58 Kneebag ................................................... 33 L Lamps see Warning and indicator lamps Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ................. 66 Function/information ...................... 65 Warning lamp (colour display) .... 183 Warning lamp (monochrome display) ........................................... 183 Lane recognition system (auto- matic) see Lane Keeping Assist Language (on-board computer) ............ 93 Licence plate lighting Changing bulbs .............................. 160 Lighting see Lights Lights Automatic headlamp mode ............. 70 Cornering light function ................. 71 Dipped-beam headlamps ................ 70 Display message ............................ 185 Driving abroad ................................. 71 Foglamps .......................................... 71 Hazard warning lamps .................. 148 Headlamp flasher ............................ 71 Headlamp range ............................... 71 Light switch ..................................... 70 Main-beam headlamps ................... 70 Rear foglamp .................................... 71 Setting the ambient lighting ......... 92 Side lamps ........................................ 71 Turn signals ..................................... 60 see Interior lighting see Replacing bulbs Limiter Calling up the stored limit speed ................................................. 67 Cancelling ......................................... 67 Deactivating ..................................... 67 Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 183 Exceeding the stored limit speed ................................................. 66 Increasing or reducing the stored limit speed ............................ 67 Limiting the speed see Speed limiter Loading guidelines ............................... 125 Locking see Central locking Locking (doors) Automatic ......................................... 75 Emergency locking ........................ 163 From inside (central locking button) .............................................. 75 Loudspeaker see Subwoofer Luggage cover see Boot separator M M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...................... 141 Main-beam headlamps Replacing bulbs ............................. 159 Switching on/off .............................. 70 Making a call Media-System ................................ 110 Malfunction Restraint system ............................. 30 Manual transmission Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 173 Display message (monochrome display) ........................................... 173 Engaging reverse gear .................... 57 Gear lever ......................................... 57 Malfunction (on-board com- puter with colour display) ............ 174 10 Index

Malfunction (on-board com-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 18 · Applies to: 453

puter with monochrome dis- play) ................................................ 174 Pulling away .................................... 54 Shift recommendation ..................... 61 Shifting to neutral ........................... 57 Starting the engine ......................... 53 Manually releasing the selector lever lock (automatic transmission) ... 158 Media-System Buttons on the multifunction steering wheel ............................... 102 Calling up menus ........................... 103 Connectivity manager ................... 123 Controls ........................................... 102 Creating favourites ........................ 105 Data connectivity .......................... 122 Display settings ............................. 104 eco score ........................................... 63 Enabling data sharing .................. 123 Home screen ................................... 103 Image playback .............................. 112 Installing apps ............................... 122 Multimedia menu ........................... 103 Navigation menu ........................... 113 Navigation system ......................... 113 Operating the radio ....................... 106 Overview ......................................... 102 Problem solving ............................. 186 Reversing camera ............................ 86 Selecting a track ............................ 112 Selecting the language ................. 104 Services menu ................................ 123 Setting warning tones ................... 105 Status and information ................. 104 System menu .................................. 104 System settings ............................. 104 Vehicle menu .................................. 103 Video playback ............................... 113 Volume/tone settings .................... 105 Warranty ........................................... 19 Message memory (colour display) ........ 91 MirrorLink® Connecting a mobile phone .......... 109 Mobile phone Connecting (Audio-System) ........... 98 Connecting (Media-System) ......... 108 Frequencies .................................... 192 Installation ..................................... 192 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 192 Model series see Vehicle identification plate Multi-functional seat see Seats Multifunction steering wheel Overview ........................................... 25 Music track Selecting (Audio-System) ............. 100 Selection (Media-System) ............. 112 N Navigation Alternative route ........................... 117 Changing the route ........................ 117 Current location ............................. 119 Destination memory ...................... 115 Entering a destination .................. 114 Entering a destination by address ............................................ 114 Entering a destination using the map ........................................... 114 Entering a POI ................................ 115 Entering/saving your home address ............................................ 115 Reading map data .......................... 114 Route details .................................. 116 Setting ............................................. 121 Setting route planning .................. 117 Setting the voice ............................ 121 Starting ........................................... 113 Starting route calculation ............ 116 Switching announcements on/off ............................................... 118 TomTom Services ........................... 120 Traffic information ........................ 119 Troubleshooting ............................. 186 Way points ...................................... 117 Notes on running in a new vehicle ....... 53 O Occupant safety Airbags .............................................. 33 Belt warning ..................................... 33 Children in the vehicle ................... 36 Index 11

PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 19 · Applies to: 453

lamp ................................................... 35 Pets in the vehicle ........................... 45 Restraint system ............................. 30 Restraint system warning lamp .... 30 Seat belts .......................................... 31 Oil see Engine oil On-board computer Important safety notes ................... 89 Menu overview (colour display) .... 90 Menu overview (monochrome display) ............................................. 90 Operation .......................................... 89 Overview ........................................... 89 Selecting the language ................... 93 Settings menu .................................. 92 On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection Operating instructions Vehicle equipment ........................... 19 Operating safety ..................................... 19 Declaration of conformity ............... 20 Operating system see On-board computer Outside temperature display Colour display .................................. 90 Monochrome display ....................... 89 Setting the units .............................. 93 Overhead control panel ......................... 27 Overrevving range ................................. 61 P Paint code ............................................. 188 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 145 Parking .................................................... 85 Important safety notes ................... 85 Parking brake ................................... 55 Reversing camera ............................ 86 Parking brake Display message ............................ 172 General information ........................ 55 Warning lamp ................................. 172 PASSENGER AIR BAG Disabling/activating ....................... 39 Indicator lamps ................................ 35 Passenger airbag Enabling and disabling ................. 39 Problem (malfunction) ................. 168 Passenger seat Folding down .................................. 127 Petrol ....................................................... 67 Pets in the vehicle ................................. 45 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) ... 146 Power windows see Side windows Protection against theft Anti-theft alarm system ................. 88 Protection of the environment General notes ................................... 18 Pulling away General notes ................................... 54 Q QR code Rescue card ...................................... 22 Qualified specialist workshop ............... 21 R Radio Display mode .................................. 106 Displaying radio text ...................... 97 Operating (Audio-System) .............. 96 Operation (Media-System) ........... 106 Radio text Displaying (Audio-System) ............ 97 Displaying (Media-System) .......... 107 Radio-based vehicle components Declaration of conformity ............... 20 Rain/light sensor (display message) .. 184 Reading lamp .......................................... 72 Rear foglamp Switching on/off .............................. 71 Rear foglamps Replacing bulbs ............................. 159 Rear lamps Changing bulbs .............................. 159 Rear parking aid Deactivating/activating ................. 86 Function/notes ................................. 85 Rear soft top Closing ............................................ 126 Opening ........................................... 126 12 Index

Rear window heating

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 20 · Applies to: 453

Air-conditioning system ................ 81 Automatic climate control .............. 82 Rear window wiper Replacing the wiper blade ............ 142 Switching on/off .............................. 73 Rear-view mirror .................................... 51 Recycling see Protection of the environment Refuelling Fuel filler flap .................................. 68 Fuel gauge ........................................ 89 Important safety notes ................... 67 Refuelling process ........................... 68 see Fuel Replacing bulbs Brake lamp ...................................... 159 Dipped-beam headlamps .............. 159 Fitting/removing the cover (front wheel arch) .......................... 159 Important safety notes ................. 158 Licence plate lighting ................... 160 Main-beam headlamps ................. 159 Overview of bulb types ................. 190 Rear fog lamp ................................. 159 Reversing lamp .............................. 159 Turn signals (front) ....................... 159 Turn signals (rear) ........................ 159 Replacing the bulb Turn signals ................................... 159 Rescue card ............................................. 22 Reserve fuel Display message ............................ 170 Restraint system Display message ............................ 168 Function during an accident .......... 31 Limited protection ........................... 30 Malfunction ...................................... 30 Operational readiness ..................... 30 Protection provided ......................... 30 System self-test .............................. 30 Warning lamp ................................. 168 Warning lamp (function) ................ 30 Rev counter ............................................. 61 Reverse gear Engaging (automatic transmis- sion) ................................................... 58 Engaging (manual transmis- sion) ................................................... 57 Reversing camera Cleaning instructions ................... 144 Function/notes ................................. 86 Switching on/off .............................. 87 Reversing feature Side windows .................................... 76 Reversing lamp Changing bulbs .............................. 159 Roof lining Cleaning .......................................... 145 Roof lining and carpets (cleaning instructions) ......................................... 146 S Safety Children in the vehicle ................... 36 see Occupant safety see Operating safety SD card Inserting an SD card ...................... 114 Removing an SD card ..................... 114 SD card slot ..................................... 102 Seat Folding passenger seat down ....... 127 Seat belt Limited protection ........................... 32 Protection provided ......................... 31 Seat belts Cleaning .......................................... 146 Fastening .......................................... 33 Releasing .......................................... 33 Warning lamp ................................. 167 Warning lamp (function) ................ 33 Seat heating ............................................ 83 Seats Adjusting (manually) ...................... 49 Cleaning the cover ......................... 146 Correct driver's seat position ......... 49 Important safety notes ................... 49 Switching seat heating on/off ........ 83 Sensors (cleaning instructions) .......... 144 Service Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Service cover ........................................ 130 Index 13

Service display

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 21 · Applies to: 453

Calling up (on-board computer with colour display) ........................ 91 Calling up (on-board computer with monochrome display) ............. 90 Service due date Display message ............................ 175 Service products Brake fluid ...................................... 190 Coolant (engine) ............................. 134 Engine oil ........................................ 190 Fuel .................................................. 190 Important safety notes ................. 131 Washer fluid ................................... 190 Shift recommendation ........................... 61 Side lamps Switching on/off .............................. 71 Side spars Fitting ............................................... 79 Removing .......................................... 78 Side windows Important safety notes ................... 76 Opening/closing ............................... 77 Problem (malfunction) .................. 165 Resetting ......................................... 165 Reversing feature ............................ 76 Sidebag .................................................... 33 smart Centre see Qualified specialist workshop Snow chains .......................................... 141 Socket (12 V) Centre console .................................. 84 Soft top Cleaning .......................................... 145 Closing .............................................. 77 Important safety notes ................... 77 Opening ............................................. 77 Speakers see Subwoofer Specialist workshop ............................... 21 Speed limiter Activating ......................................... 66 Functions and conditions for activation ......................................... 66 Setting limit speed .......................... 67 Speedometer Digital ............................................... 90 see Instrument cluster Start/stop function see Automatic start/stop system Starting (engine) .................................... 53 Starting the engine see Starting (engine) Station Setting (Media-System) ................ 107 Station search Audio-System ................................... 97 Media-System ................................ 107 Stations Setting (Audio-System) .................. 96 Storing (Audio-System) .................. 97 Steering Display message (colour dis- play) ................................................ 181 Warning lamps ............................... 181 Steering wheel Adjusting (manually) ...................... 51 Button overview ............................... 25 Cleaning .......................................... 145 Gearshift paddles ............................ 60 Important safety notes ................... 51 Stowage areas ....................................... 124 Stowage compartment in the tail- gate ........................................................ 124 Stowage compartments Centre console ................................ 124 Cup holder ....................................... 124 Door ................................................. 124 Glove compartment ........................ 124 Important safety information ...... 124 Spectacles compartment ............... 124 Subwoofer Fitting/removing ........................... 129 Sun visor ................................................. 74 T Tailgate Opening dimensions ...................... 188 Opening/closing ............................. 125 Warning lamp ................................. 166 Tailgate (Cabriolet) Opening/closing ............................. 126 Tank see Fuel tank 14 Index

Technical data

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 22 · Applies to: 453

Information .................................... 188 Vehicle data .................................... 188 Telephone Charging (Media-System) ............. 108 see Mobile phone Telephone book Loading (Audio-System) ................. 98 Telephone operation Audio-System ................................... 99 Temperature Setting (air conditioning) ............... 80 Setting (automatic climate con- trol) .................................................... 81 Time Setting (Audio-System) .................. 96 Setting (on-board computer with colour display) ........................ 92 Setting (on-board computer with monochrome display) ............. 92 Setting the time mode (on- board computer with colour display) ............................................. 92 TIREFIT kit ............................................ 150 TomTom Services Introduction ................................... 120 My Services menu .......................... 120 Traffic information menu ............. 120 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether .............................................. 38 Total distance recorder Colour display .................................. 91 Monochrome display ....................... 89 Setting the display unit ................. 93 Touchscreen Confirming settings with Done .... 103 Operating the touchscreen ........... 103 Tow-starting Emergency engine starting .......... 157 Important safety notes ................. 155 Towing Important safety notes ................. 155 With the rear axle raised .............. 157 Towing away Fitting the towing eye .................. 156 Removing the towing eye ............. 157 With both axles on the ground ..... 156 Track Selecting (Audio-System) ............. 100 Selection (Media-System) ............. 112 Traffic reports Switching on/off .............................. 97 Transmission see Automatic transmission see Manual transmission Transporting the vehicle ..................... 157 Trip computer Displaying ........................................ 91 Trip meter Colour display .................................. 91 Displaying (on-board computer with colour display) ........................ 91 Displaying (on-board computer with monochrome display) ............. 90 Resetting (on-board computer with colour display) ........................ 92 Resetting (on-board computer with monochrome display) ............. 92 Trip meter see Trip meter Turn signals Replacing bulbs (front) ................. 159 Replacing the bulb ........................ 159 Switching on/off .............................. 60 Turn signals see Turn signals Two-way radio Frequencies .................................... 192 Installation ..................................... 192 Transmission output (maxi- mum) ................................................ 192 Type identification plate see Vehicle identification plate Tyre pressure Display message ............................ 178 Not reached (TIREFIT) ................... 151 Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 151 Recommended ................................ 140 Tyre pressure monitor Function/notes ............................... 139 Radio type approval for the tyre pressure monitor ........................... 192 Restarting ....................................... 139 Warning lamp ................................. 178 Index 15

Tyres

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 23 · Applies to: 453

Changing a wheel .......................... 135 Checking ......................................... 134 Direction of rotation ...................... 138 Important safety notes ................. 134 M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............... 141 Service life ...................................... 136 Snow chains .................................... 141 Storing ............................................ 139 Tyre tread ....................................... 134 see Flat tyre U Unlocking From inside the vehicle (central unlocking button) ............................ 75 With emergency key element ....... 163 USB device Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 100 Connection (Media-System) ......... 111 Operating (Audio-System) ............ 100 Operation (Media-System) ........... 111 USB port Audio-System ................................... 94 Media-System ................................ 102 V Vehicle Data acquisition .............................. 22 Electronics ........................................ 19 Equipment ........................................ 19 Implied warranty ............................. 19 Locking (in an emergency) ........... 163 Locking (key) .................................... 87 Operating safety .............................. 19 Parking up ...................................... 147 Raising ............................................ 137 Registration ...................................... 21 Securing from rolling away .......... 148 Tow-starting .................................. 157 Towing away .................................. 155 Transporting .................................. 157 Unlocking (in an emergency) ....... 163 Unlocking (key) ................................ 49 Vehicle data .................................... 188 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle data .......................................... 188 Vehicle dimensions .............................. 188 Vehicle emergency locking ................. 163 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate ................. 188 Vehicle tool kit ..................................... 149 VIN ......................................................... 188 Voice control system Entering a destination in the navigation system ......................... 115 Problems with the voice control system ............................................. 187 Starting an application ................. 102 Volume/sound settings Audio-System ................................... 96 Media-System ................................ 105 W Warning and indicator lamps ABS ................................................... 176 Automatic Start/Stop function (green) ............................................. 172 Automatic Start/Stop function (yellow) ........................................... 172 Battery ............................................ 184 Brakes .............................................. 172 Distance warning function (red) .. 182 EBD ................................................... 176 ESP® (yellow) .................................. 177 Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 182 Oil pressure .................................... 171 Overview ........................................... 29 Parking brake ................................. 172 PASSENGER AIR BAG ........................ 35 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 168 Seat belt .......................................... 167 Steering ........................................... 181 Tyre pressure monitor .................. 178 Warning triangle .................................. 149 Wheel bolt tightening torque .............. 138 Wheels Changing a wheel .......................... 135 Checking ......................................... 134 Cleaning .......................................... 144 Fitting a new wheel ....................... 138 Important safety notes ................. 134 16 Index

Removing a wheel .......................... 137

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 24 · Applies to: 453

Snow chains .................................... 141 Storing ............................................ 139 Tightening torque ......................... 138 Windows Cleaning .......................................... 144 see Side windows Windscreen Demisting (air-conditioning system) ............................................. 81 Demisting (automatic climate control) ............................................. 82 Windscreen washer fluid see Windscreen washer system Windscreen washer system Important safety notes ................. 134 Topping up ..................................... 134 Windscreen wipers Intermittent wipe ............................ 73 Problem (malfunction) .................. 167 Rear window wiper .......................... 73 Replacing the wiper blades .......... 141 Switching on/off .............................. 72 Winter driving General notes ................................... 65 Winter operation Slippery road surfaces .................... 65 Snow chains .................................... 141 Winter tyres M+S tyres ........................................ 141 Wiper blades Cleaning .......................................... 145 Replacing (on the rear window) ... 142 Replacing (windscreen) ................ 142 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Index 17

Protection of the environment

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 25 · Applies to: 453

General notes H Environmental note Daimler's declared policy is one of inte- grated environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resour- ces which form the basis of our existence on this planet to be used sparingly and in a manner which takes the requirements of both nature and humanity into account. You too can help to protect the environ- ment by operating your vehicle in an envi- ronmentally responsible manner. Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, transmission, brake and tyre wear depend on the following factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Ryour personal driving style You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Operating conditions Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel consumption. Rmake sure that the tyre pressures are always correct. Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- sumption. Rremove rear racks once you no longer need them. Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con- tribute to environmental protection. You should therefore adhere to the service intervals. Ralways have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a smart Centre. Personal driving style Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. Rdo not warm up the engine with the vehi- cle stationary. Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration. Rchange gear in good time, if possible in accordance with the gearshift recom- mendations in the multifunction dis- play. Rshift up to the next gear as early as pos- sible. Rswitch off the engine in stationary traf- fic. Returning an end-of-life vehicle EU countries only: smart will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. Returning vehicles to these facilities is free of charge. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national smart website for your country. smart genuine parts H Environmental note Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. For these, the same warranty applies as for new parts. ! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be installed in the following areas of your vehicle: Rdoors Rdoor pillars Rdoor sills Rseats Rdashboard 18

Introduction.

Rinstrument cluster

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 26 · Applies to: 453

Rcentre console Do not install accessories such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. You could impair the operating efficiency of the restraint sys- tems. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. Only smart genuine parts or parts of the same quality may be used. In addition, only approved wheels, tyres and accessories for the particular type of vehicle may be used. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) when ordering smart genuine parts. Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevant equipment not approved by smart could jeopardise the operational safety of the vehi- cle. Safety-relevant systems, such as the brake system, may malfunction. smart tests genuine parts and conversion parts and accessories that have been specif- ically approved for your vehicle for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, smart is unable to assess other parts. smart therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in smart vehicles, even if they have been offi- cially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. In Germany, certain parts are only officially approved for installation or modification if they comply with legal requirements. This also applies to some other countries. All gen- uine smart parts meet the approval require- ments. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. The following situations will invalidate the operating permit: RThe vehicle type changes from that stated in the vehicle's operating permit, due to modifications. ROther road users are likely to be endan- gered. REmissions or noise characteristics deteri- orate. Warranty for the smart Audio-System and smart Media-System The smart sales organisation provides a war- ranty for a period of 24 months without a kil- ometre limit for the smart Audio-System and the smart Media-System. The warranty issuer is the respective sales organisation in the country in which the accessory or replacement part was pur- chased (see list in the service booklet). Vehicle equipment This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle at the time of pub- lication of this Owner's Manual. Country- specific differences are possible. Please note that the vehicle equipment may differ from certain descriptions and illustrations provi- ded in this manual. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. The vehicle's original purchase contract documentation contains a list of all the sys- tems in your vehicle. Please contact any smart centre to help clarify any questions related to the vehicle equipment and opera- tion. Operating safety Important safety notes G WARNING If you do not have the prescribed service/ maintenance work or necessary repairs carried out, this could result in malfunc- tions or system failures. There is a risk of an accident. Always have the prescribed service/main- tenance work as well as necessary repairs carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into con-

Introduction. 19 Z

tact with hot parts of the exhaust system.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 27 · Applies to: 453

There is a risk of fire. When driving off road or on unpaved roads, check the vehicle's underside regularly. In particular, remove parts of plants or other flammable materials which have become trapped. In the case of damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. G WARNING Modifications to electronic components, their software as well as wiring could affect their function and/or the operation of other networked components. This could in particular also be the case for systems relevant to safety. They might not function properly anymore and/or jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an accident and injury. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. Always have work on electrical and elec- tronic components carried out at a quali- fied specialist workshop. If you make any changes to the vehicle elec- tronics, the general operating permit is ren- dered invalid. ! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if: Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road Ryou drive too quickly over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, slowing thresholds or a pot- hole in the road Ra heavy object strikes the underbody or parts of the chassis In situations like this, the body, under- body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres could be damaged without the damage being visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to withstand. If the underbody panelling is damaged, combustible materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can gather between the underbody and the underbody panelling. If these materials come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system, they can catch fire. In such situations, have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If, on con- tinuing your journey, you notice that driv- ing safety is impaired, stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. In such cases, consult a qualified specialist workshop. The multimedia device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information is available from any smart Centre. The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB) may be impaired if roof carriers are used. Attaching metallised retrofit film to windows may also affect radio and GPS reception and have a negative impact on all other aerial functions in the vehicle interior. Declarations of conformity Wireless vehicle components The following information applies to all com- ponents of the vehicle and the information systems and communication devices inte- grated into the vehicle which receive and/or transmit radio waves: All wireless vehicle components as well as information systems and communications 20

Introduction.

equipment integrated into the vehicle are

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 28 · Applies to: 453

compliant with the basic requirements and all other relevant regulations stipulated in the 1999/5/EC Directive. Further information is available from any smart Centre. Electromagnetic compatibility The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation ECE-R 10. Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is only intended for the connection of diagnostic equipment at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, it may affect the operation of vehicle systems. As a result, the operating safety of the vehicle could be affected. There is a risk of an accident. Only connect equipment to a diagnostics connection in the vehicle, which is approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Benz. G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. ! If the engine is switched off and a device is connected to a diagnostic connection, the battery may become discharged. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics connection can result in the resetting of the emissions monitoring information, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions test during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop A qualified specialist workshop has the nec- essary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant to safety. Observe the information contained in the Service Booklet. Always have the following work carried out on your vehicle at a smart centre: Rwork relevant to safety Rservice and maintenance work Rrepair work Rmodifications, installations and conver- sions Rwork on electronic components Vehicle registration smart may ask its smart centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. smart is only able to notify the vehicle owner about vehicle inspections if smart has the vehicle registration data. In the following cases, it is possible that a vehicle has not yet been registered in the owner's name: Rthe vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer Rthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a smart centre smart recommends registering the vehicle in a smart centre. Notify smart as soon as possible if there is a change of address or if ownership of the vehicles changes. This can be done at a smart centre, for example.

Introduction. 21 Z

Correct use

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 29 · Applies to: 453

If warning stickers are removed, you may fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in place. The following are important sources of infor- mation in regard to vehicle use: RSafety notes in this Owner's Manual RTechnical data in this Owner's Manual RTraffic rules and regulations RLaws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Implied warranty ! Follow the instructions in this manual about the proper operation of your vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. Damage to your vehicle that arises from culpable contraventions against these instructions is not covered either by the smart implied warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. QR codes for rescue card The QR code is on the fuel filler flap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on the opposite side. In the event of an accident, rescue serv- ices can use the QR code to quickly determine the corresponding rescue card for a vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about the vehicle in compact form, such as the routing of the electric cables. Further information: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code Data stored in the vehicle Many of the vehicle's electronic components contain data memories. These data memories store technical information temporarily or permanently on components, systems or the environment concerning: Rcondition Revents Rfaults The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's movements. Examples of information stored include: Rthe operating conditions of system com- ponents, such as fluid levels Rstatus messages concerning the vehicle and its individual components, such as speed and accelerator position Rmalfunctions and defects in key system components, such as the lights and brakes Rvehicle reactions and operating condi- tions in specific driving situations, such as deployment of an airbag Rambient conditions, such as outside tem- perature This data is purely technical in nature and is used for the following: Rto assist in the detection and elimination of faults and defects Rto analyse vehicle functions, e.g. after an accident has occurred Rto optimise vehicle functions This technical information is also read out for the following services: Rrepair work Rservice work Rwarranty claims Rquality assurance The readout is handled by service network staff (including the manufacturer) with the help of special diagnostic testers. You can obtain more information there, if required. After the fault has been rectified, the infor- mation is cleared in the fault memory or is sequentially overwritten. During vehicle operation, certain situations may arise in which this technical data - in conjunction with other information and, if applicable, after consultation with an approved assessor - may be linked to an individual person. Examples of this include: Raccident reports Rvehicle damage Rwitness evidence Additional functions that have been contrac- tually agreed upon with the customer also make it possible to transmit particular vehi- cle data from the vehicle, such as the vehicle location in the event of an emergency. 22

Introduction.

Copyright information

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 30 · Applies to: 453

Information on licenses of Free and Open- Source software used in the vehicle and the electronic components: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Introduction. 23 Z

Cockpit

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 31 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Rev counter, dashboard clock 61 ; Instrument cluster 29 = Horn ? Instrument cluster multi- function lever 90 Windscreen wipers combi- nation switch 72 A Automatic locking feature 75 Hazard warning lamps 148 B Overhead control panel 27 C smart Audio-System 94 smart Media-System 102 D Climate control system control panel 80 Function Page E Ignition lock 53 F Adjusts the steering wheel 51 G Control panel for: Automatic start/stop sys- tem 56 Lane Keeping Assist 65 Forward collision warning 46 Parking aid 85 Headlamp range adjust- ment 71 H Lights combination switch 70 I Automatic transmission: shift paddles 60 24 Cockpit

At a glance.

Multifunction steering wheel

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 32 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Colour display of the instrument cluster 90 Monochrome display of the instrument cluster 89 ; smart Audio-System 94 smart Media-System 102 = Only for instrument cluster with colour display: WX Adjusts the vol- ume 102 Switches voice-oper- ated control on or off and accepts or ends a call 102 ? ® Increases or stores the current speed 67 − Decreases current speed 67 Function Page A ° Calls up the last speed stored 67 B ± Interrupts cruise control or the limiter 67 C ¯ Activates cruise con- trol 66 ^ Deactivates cruise control or the limiter 67 È Activates limiter 66 D Only for instrument cluster with colour display: 9: Scrolls through menus 90 a Confirms the selec- tion 92 Multifunction steering wheel 25

At a glance.

Centre console with drawer

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 33 · Applies to: 453

i Vehicles with automatic transmission Function Page : Cup holders 124 Ashtray 83 ; Drawer 124 = smart fortwo coupé: coin holder = smart fortwo cabrio: opens and closes the soft top 77 ? Selector lever 58 A Parking brake 55 Function Page B Cigarette lighter 83 Power socket 84 C smart Media-System: AUX port, USB port and SD card slot 102 D Cup holders 124 E Selector lever indicator 57 F Sets the drive programs (program selector button) 58 26 Centre console with drawer

At a glance.

Overhead control panel

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 34 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Left-hand reading lamp 72 ; Interior lighting 72 = Right-hand reading lamp 72 Function Page ? PASSENGER AIRBAG indica- tor lamps 35 A Rear-view mirror 51 Overhead control panel 27

At a glance.

Door control panel

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 35 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Opens the door 75 ; Adjusts the exterior mir- rors 52 Function Page = Opens and closes the side windows 77 28 Door control panel

At a glance.

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 36 · Applies to: 453

Function Page : Speedometer ; Display = Warning and indicator lamps C Doors or tailgate 166 7 Seat belts 167 6 Restraint system 168 ç Automatic start/stop sys- tem warning 172 è Automatic start/stop sys- tem 172 ; Engine diagnostics 170 ? Coolant temperature 171 5 Oil pressure 171 J Brakes 172 ! ABS 176 ÷ ESP® 47 h Tyre pressure monitor 178 D Power steering 181 Function Page · Distance warning signal 182 ^ Forward collision warning 182 Ã Lane Keeping Assist 182

Battery 184 R Rear foglamp 71 O Foglamps 71 K Main-beam headlamps 70 L Dipped-beam headlamps 70 T Side lamps 71 S Transmission electronics 174 8 Reserve fuel level reached 170 ¯ Cruise control 183 È Limiter 183 Ò Black ice warning 184 b Brake lamps 184 ¯ ° Next service due date 175 Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display 29

At a glance.

Occupant safety

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 37 · Applies to: 453

Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint sys- tem The restraint system includes the: Rseat belt system Rairbags Rchild restraint system Rchild seat securing system In an accident the restraint system can: Rreduce the risk of vehicle occupants com- ing into contact with parts of the vehicle interior Rreduce the forces to which vehicle occu- pants are subjected A seat belt can only provide maximum pro- tection when worn correctly. Depending on the type of accident detected, seat belt ten- sioners and/or airbags may supplement a correctly worn seat belt. Not every accident will trigger the seat belt tensioners and/or deploy the airbags. To ensure that the restraint system provides the maximum protection, every vehicle occu- pant must: Rbe seated with the seat belt fastened cor- rectly Rbe in an almost upright position with their back against the seat backrest Rhave their feet resting on the floor, if pos- sible Ralways be secured in special restraint sys- tems suitable for smart vehicles if under 1.50 m tall However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the out- side. The risk of injuries due to a deployed airbag also cannot be completely eliminated. Limited protection from restraint system G WARNING If the restraint system is modified, it may no longer work as intended. The restraint system may then not perform its intended protective function by failing in an acci- dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam- ple. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify parts of the restraint system. Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well as electronic components or their software. If the vehicle needs to be adjusted to accom- modate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. smart recom- mends that you only use driving assistance systems which have been approved for your vehicle by smart. Preparing the restraint system for oper- ation When the ignition is switched on, the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up during the system self-test. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint sys- tem are then ready for operation. Restraint system malfunctions RWhen the ignition is switched on, the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up. RWhile driving, the 6 restraint system warning lamp remains lit or lights up repeatedly. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be trig- gered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. 30 Occupant safety

Safety.

Restraint system response during an

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 38 · Applies to: 453

accident The way the restraint system responds depends on the severity of the impact detec- ted and the apparent type of accident: RHead-on collision RRear impact RSide impact The activation threshold for the restraint system components is determined based on the analysis of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering proc- ess of the restraint system components should take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and meas- ured after a collision has occurred do not play a decisive role in the deployment of an airbag, nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an air- bag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If, for instance, very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal body members are hit, the rate of vehicle deceleration may be sufficient. The restraint system components can be activated or triggered independently of each other: Component Detected trigger sit- uation Belt tensioners Head-on collision, rear impact, side impact Driver's airbag, front-passenger front airbag and kneebag Head-on collision Sidebag Side impact G WARNING After the airbag deploys, the airbag parts are hot. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. i smart recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt ten- sioner was triggered or an airbag was deployed. If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air- bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: RThe bang will not usually affect your hear- ing. RIn general, the powder released is not haz- ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary condi- tions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehi- cle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Seat belts Protection provided by seat belts Always fasten seat belts correctly before starting your journey. A seat belt can only provide maximum protection when worn cor- rectly. G WARNING If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it can- not perform its intended protective func- tion. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Occupant safety 31

Safety. Z

RThe seat belt must:

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 39 · Applies to: 453

• not be twisted and must be tight and fit snugly across your body
• be routed across the centre of the shoul- der and as low down across your hips as possible RThe shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. RAvoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. RPress the lap belt down into your hip joints and pull tight by the shoulder section of the belt. The lap belt must never be routed across your stomach or abdomen. RNever route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. ROnly one person per seat belt. Infants and children must never travel sitting on the lap of a vehicle occupant. RNever secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securing objects, luggage or loads (Y page 125). If children are travelling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 36). Limited protection from seat belts G WARNING The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an acci- dent, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat- belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belts correctly without an additional suitable restraint system. If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. Further- more, an incorrectly worn seat belt can cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident, heavy braking or sudden changes of direction. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tall in additional suitable restraint systems. G WARNING Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if: Rthey are damaged, have been modified, are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Rmodifications have been made to the belt tensioners, belt anchorages or inertia reels Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam- age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splint- ers. Modified or damaged seat belts can tear or fail, for example in the event of an accident. Modified seat belt tensioners may be deployed unintentionally or not function as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never modify seat belts, seat belt tension- ers, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are not damaged or worn and are clean. After an accident, have the seat belts checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. smart recommends that you only use seat belts which have been approved specifically for your vehicle by smart. G WARNING Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which have been triggered are no longer operational and therefore cannot protect as intended. 32 Occupant safety

  Safety.

There is an increased risk of injury, pos-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 40 · Applies to: 453

sibly even fatal.

Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners which

have been triggered replaced at a qualified

specialist workshop immediately.

smart recommends that you have the vehicle

towed to a qualified specialist workshop

after an accident.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled

up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue

will be trapped in the door or in the seat

mechanism. This could damage the door,

the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-

aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their

protective function and must be replaced.

Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

If the seat belt is pulled out quickly or

sharply, the inertia reel locks. The belt strap

cannot be pulled out any further.

! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, do

not engage the seat belt tongue in the

buckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise,

the belt tensioner could be triggered in the

event of an accident and would have to be

replaced.

For easy fastening, the seat belt is guided

through a belt loop on the side of the driver's

seat.

Buckle ; Belt tongue X To fasten: always engage seat belt tongue ; into buckle : of the corre- sponding seat. X To release: press the release button in belt buckle : and guide the seat belt back by belt tongue ;. Belt warning for the driver and front- passenger The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instrument display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. The belt warning goes out as soon as the driver and front-passenger fasten their seat belts. i If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and the child is not secured using the seat belt of the front-passenger seat, the belt warning may be activated. In this case, you can insert the belt tongue of the seat belt into the belt buckle belonging to the front-passenger seat. To do this, guide the seat belt between the ISOFIX child restraint system or i-Size child restraint system and the backrest of the front-passenger seat. Airbags Overview of airbags The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. A deployed airbag can increase the level of protection provided to the vehicle occupant. Occupant safety 33

Safety. Z

AIRBAG

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 41 · Applies to: 453

Possible protection for: : Kneebag Thigh, knee and lower leg ; Driver's air- bag Head and thorax = Front- passenger front airbag Head and thorax ? Sidebag Head and thorax The front-passenger front airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. If the front- passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front-passenger front air- bag is correct both before and during the journey (Y page 35). Protection provided by the airbags Depending on the type of accident, an airbag can supplement a correctly worn seat belt and provide added protection. G WARNING If you deviate from the correct seat posi- tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten- ded protective function and can even cause additional injuries when deployed. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. In order to avoid such risks, always ensure that all vehicle occupants: Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ- ing pregnant women Rare seated correctly and maintain the furthest possible distance from the air- bags Robserve the following notes Always ensure that there are no objects located between the airbag and the vehicle occupant. To avoid risks as a result of a deployed air- bag: RAdjust seats correctly before starting your journey and move the driver's and front- passenger seat as far back as possible. Always observe the information on the correct driver's seat position (Y page 49). ROnly hold onto the outside of the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. RAlways lean against the backrest while driving. Do not lean forwards or lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. RAlways keep your feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the dashboard, for exam- ple. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. RWhen children are travelling in the vehi- cle, follow the related additional notes (Y page 36). RAlways properly stow and secure objects. Objects in the vehicle interior may limit an airbag's ability to function correctly. There- fore, always make sure that: RThere are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air- bag. RThere are no objects between the seat, the door and the door pillar (B-pillar). RNo hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, are hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. RNo accessories, such as cup holders, are attached to the vehicle within the deploy- ment area of an airbag, e.g. to doors, side windows or side trim panels. RNo heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in the pockets of clothing Store such objects in a suitable place. Limited protection from airbags G WARNING If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function correctly. There is an increased risk of injury. Never modify an airbag cover or affix objects to it. 34 Occupant safety

Safety.

G WARNING

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 42 · Applies to: 453

Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct or even prevent deployment of the airbags integrated into the seats. The airbags may then fail to protect the vehicle occupants as intended. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Use only seat covers which have been spe- cifically approved for the respective seat by smart. G WARNING Sensors to control the airbags are located in the doors. Modifications or work not per- formed correctly to the doors or door pan- elling, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the function of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properly any more. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu- pants as they are designed to do. This poses an increased risk of injury. Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door panelling carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING An airbag that has been deployed once cannot provide any further protection and, in the event of an accident, can no longer perform its intended protective function. There is an increased risk of injury. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- cialist workshop to have the deployed air- bag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immedi- ately. Status of the front-passenger front air- bag PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps The front-passenger front airbag can be enabled or disabled using the airbag-off switch in the instrument cluster on the front-passenger side (Y page 39). The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp and PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp are part of the front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The indicator lamps display the status of the front-passenger front airbag. RPASSENGER AIRBAG OFF lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. RPASSENGER AIRBAG ON lights up: the front-passenger front airbag is enabled. The front-passenger front airbag may deploy during an accident. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure that the status of the front-passenger front airbag is correct for the prevailing con- ditions both before and during the journey. RChildren in a child restraint system: whether the front-passenger front airbag must be enabled or disabled depends on the installed child restraint system, and the age and size of the child. Make sure that you observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 36). There you will also find instructions on backwards and forwards-facing child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat. RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front- passenger front airbag is enabled. Be sure to observe the notes on "Seat belts" (Y page 31) and "Airbags" (Y page 34). There you can also find information on the correct seat position. Observe the information on the airbag deac- tivation system of the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 39). Occupant safety 35

Safety. Z

Children in the vehicle

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 43 · Applies to: 453

Travelling safely with children on board G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. G WARNING If the child restraint system is placed in direct sunlight, the parts could become very hot. Children could be suffer burns by touching these parts, in particular on the metallic parts of the child restraint sys- tem. There is a risk of injury. If you and your child leave the vehicle, always make sure that the child restraint system is not in direct sunlight. Cover it with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, leave it to cool down before securing the child in it. Never leave chil- dren unattended in the vehicle. To provide better protection to children younger than 12 years old and under 1.50 m tall, smart recommends always observing the following: RSecure children only in a child restraint system that is appropriate for the age, weight and size of the child and that is recommended and suitable for use in smart vehicles. Make sure you observe the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. ROnly use the following securing systems with the child restraint systems: - the seat belt system - the ISOFIX or i‑Size securing rings - the Top Tether anchorages RThe manufacturer's child restraint system installation instructions. RThe warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. G WARNING If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted on the seat position suitable for this purpose, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the correct use for the child restraint system. Make sure that the entire surface of the child restraint system is resting on the seat surface. Never place objects under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Only use child restraint systems with the original cover designed for them. Only replace damaged covers with genuine covers. G WARNING If the child restraint system is fitted incor- rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in the event of an accident, heavy braking or a sudden change in direction. The child restraint system could be thrown about, striking vehicle occupants. There is an 36 Children in the vehicle

Safety.

increased risk of injury, possibly even

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 44 · Applies to: 453

fatal. Always fit child restraint systems prop- erly, even if they are not being used. Make sure that you observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. G WARNING Child restraint systems or their securing systems that have been damaged or sub- jected to a load in an accident cannot per- form their intended protective function. In the event of an accident, sharp braking or a sudden change in direction, the child may not be held securely. There is an increased risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Immediately replace child restraint sys- tems that have been damaged or subjected to a load in an accident. Have the child restraint securing systems checked in a qualified specialist workshop before fit- ting a child restraint system again. i Use the smart care products to clean the child restraint systems recommended by smart. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop. Also, always observe the detailed informa- tion below: RWhen fitting a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, observe the notes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat (Y page 40). RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint systems (Y page 41). RNotes on recommended child restraint systems (Y page 44). RInstructions and safety notes on disabling and enabling the front-passenger front airbag (Y page 39). RNotes on seat belts (Y page 31). ISOFIX and i‑Size child seat securing systems Notes on ISOFIX and i-Size child seat securing systems G WARNING ISOFIX child restraint systems or i-Size child restraint systems do not offer suffi- cient protection for children whose weight is greater than 22 kg, who are secured using the safety belt integrated in the child restraint system. The child could, for example, not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. If the child weighs more than 22 kg, only use ISOFIX child restraint systems or i- Size child restraint systems with which the child is also secured with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. ISOFIX and i‑Size are standardised securing systems for special restraint systems. ISOFIX child restraint systems are approved in accordance with ECE R44, i‑Size child restraint systems are approved in accord- ance with ECE R129. Only child restraint systems that comply with the ECE R44 standard may be attached to the ISOFIX securing rings. ISOFIX child restraint systems approved in accordance with ECE R44 and i-Size child restraint sys- tems approved in accordance with ECE R129 can be attached to i-Size securing rings. If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the child is not secured using the seat belt of the front-passenger seat, the belt warning may be activated (Y page 33). Children in the vehicle 37

Safety. Z

To deactivate the belt warning for the front-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 45 · Applies to: 453

passenger, proceed as follows: X Insert the seat belt tongue into the buckle before the child restraint system is fitted to the front-passenger seat. X Then fit the ISOFIX child restraint system to the front-passenger seat (with seat belt fastened). Make sure that the seat belt does not become damaged. Symbol for ISOFIX child seat securing system Symbol for i-Size child seat securing system Attaching ISOFIX and i‑Size child seat securing systems When fitting a child restraint system, be sure to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use of the child restraint system. Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Size securing rings. X Install the ISOFIX child restraint system on both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Size securing rings ;. or X Install the i-Size or ISOFIX child restraint system on both i-Size securing rings ;. Securing Top Tether Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury, since it provides an additional connection between the child restraint system secured with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle. The child restraint system must be equipped with a Top Tether belt. 38 Children in the vehicle

Safety.

Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the lug-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 46 · Applies to: 453

gage compartment floor. X Fit the ISOFIX child restraint system with Top Tether. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions when doing so. X Route Top Tether belt ? back over the head restraint, keeping it as central as possible, into the luggage compartment through loop :. X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tether belt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;. Lift up the carpet a little if necessary. Ensure that: RTop Tether hook = is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ; as shown. RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted. X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always comply with the child restraint system manufac- turer's installation instructions when doing so. Disabling/enabling the front- passenger front airbag G WARNING If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air- bag is disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot per- form its intended protective function. A person in the front-passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the per- son is sitting too close to the dashboard. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. In this case the front-passenger seat may not be used. You may only transport a child on the front-passenger seat if they are seated in a suitable rearward or forward- facing child restraint system. Always observe the information about suitable positioning of the child restraint system in this Owner's Manual as well as the child restraint system manufacturer's installa- tion instructions. G WARNING If you secure a child on the co-driver's seat in a rearward-facing child restraint sys- tem and the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indi- cator lamp lights up, the co-driver's airbag could be deployed in the event of an acci- dent. The child could be struck by the air- bag. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. In this case, always ensure that the co- driver's airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must light up. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward- facing child restraint system to the front- passenger seat. For more information, see "Problems with automatic front-passenger airbag deactivation" (Y page 168). G WARNING If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat and you position the front- passenger seat too close to the dashboard, in the event of an accident, the child could: Rcome into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Children in the vehicle 39

Safety. Z

Move the front-passenger seat as far back

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 47 · Applies to: 453

as possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for- wards and downwards from the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front- passenger seat accordingly. Additionally, always observe the information on suita- ble positioning of the child restraint sys- tem in this Owner's Manual in addition to the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you use a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, you must disable the front-passenger front air- bag. The airbag-off switch for manually enabling and disabling the front-passenger front air- bag is in the dashboard on the front- passenger side. X Push in front-passenger airbag-off switch : beyond the point of resistance. X To disable the front-passenger front air- bag: turn airbag-off switch : anti-clock- wise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica- tor lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 35). X To enable the front-passenger front air- bag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise. The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up and stays on when the ignition is switched on (Y page 35). The front-passenger airbag is enabled when the ignition is switched on unless the front- passenger front airbag has been manually disabled. If the front-passenger front airbag is disabled and the ignition is switched on, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicator lamp in the overhead control panel (Y page 35) lights up permanently. Child restraint systems on the front- passenger seat Notes on child restraint systems If you secure a child in a child restraint sys- tem on the front-passenger seat, always observe the information on "Disabling the front-passenger front airbag" (Y page 39). You avoid risks when you: Renable or disable the front-passenger front airbag correctly Rposition the child restraint system favour- ably 40 Children in the vehicle

Safety.

A warning notice is located on the front-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 48 · Applies to: 453

passenger sun visor. G WARNING If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Notes on rearward and forward facing child restraint systems Warning symbol for a rearward-facing child restraint system If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front- passenger seat, always make sure that the front-passenger front airbag is disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is permanently lit (Y page 35). When using child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat, always observe the following: RMove the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. RThe base of the child restraint system must lie fully against the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. RThe back of a forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possi- ble against the front-passenger backrest. The child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. RAdjust the angle of the seat backrest accordingly. RAlways make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and rear- wards from the vehicle belt outlet. RNever place objects, such as a cushion, under or behind the child restraint system. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. Suitability of the seats for child restraint systems Notes on attaching suitable child restraint systems Only child restraint systems that meet the following ECE standards are permitted for use in the vehicle: RECE R44 RECE R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems) Children in the vehicle 41

Safety. Z

Label for an ECE R44 compliant child restraint

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 49 · Applies to: 453

system Label for an ECE R129 compliant child restraint system ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems in the following "Universal" category may be used on seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U in accordance with the tables on the suitability of the seats for attaching child restraint sys- tems. Semi-universal child restraint systems are indicated by the text "Semi-universal" on the approval label. Use is only permitted if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems Observe the following notes: RFor certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, the maximum size setting may be restricted, for instance due to possible contact with the roof. RThe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. RObserve the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Legend for the table: RX: Not suitable for children in this weight category. RU:Suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category used in this weight cat- egory. RUF: Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category used in this weight category. RL: Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 44) or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. 42 Children in the vehicle

Safety.

Weight categories

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 50 · Applies to: 453

Front-passenger front air- bag is enabled Front-passenger front air- bag is disabled1 Category 0: up to10 kg X U, L Category 0+: up to13 kg X U, L Category I:9to18 kg UF, L U, L Category II:15to25 kg UF, L U, L Category III:22to36 kg U, L U, L Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems Observe the following notes: RFor certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, the maximum size setting may be restricted, for instance due to possible contact with the roof. RThe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. RObserve the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Legend for the table: RX: Not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category. RUF: Suitable for forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category used in this weight category. RL: Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in accordance with the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 44) or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. Weight category Size cate- gory Equipment Front- passenger front airbag is enabled Front- passenger front airbag is disabled2 Carry-cot F ISO/L1 X X G ISO/L2 X X 0 up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months E ISO/R1 X IL 0+ up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months E ISO/R1 X IL D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL I 9 kg up to 18 kg between approximately 9 months and 4 years D ISO/R2 X IL C ISO/R3 X IL B ISO/F2 IUF IUF 1 The vehicle is equipped with a front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 2 The vehicle is equipped with a front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. Children in the vehicle 43

Safety. Z

Weight category

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 51 · Applies to: 453

Size cate- gory Equipment Front- passenger front airbag is enabled Front- passenger front airbag is disabled2 B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF A ISO/F3 IUF IUF Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems Observe the following notes: RFor certain child restraint systems in weight categories II or III, the maximum size setting may be restricted, for instance due to possible contact with the roof. RThe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be put under strain by the head restraint. RObserve the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Legend for the table: RX: Not suitable for an i-Size child restraint system in this weight category. Ri-U: Suitable for a forward-facing or rearward-facing i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category. Ri‑UF: Suitable for a forward-facing i-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" cate- gory. Front-passenger front airbag is enabled Front-passenger front airbag is disabled3 i‑Size child restraint sys- tems i‑UF i‑U Overview of recommended child restraint systems The smart fortwo is equipped with a manual front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys- tem. X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable the front-passenger airbag (Y page 39). Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt Weight category Manufacturer Type Approval num- ber(E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...) with colour code 9H95 Category 0: up to 10 kg up to approximately 6 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 2 The vehicle is equipped with a front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 3 The vehicle is equipped with a front-passenger front airbag deactivation system. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. 44 Children in the vehicle

Safety.

Weight category

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 52 · Applies to: 453

Manufacturer Type Approval num- ber(E1 ...) Order number (A 000 ...) with colour code 9H95 Category 0+: up to 13 kg up to approximately 15 months Britax Römer BABY SAFE PLUS 03 301146 04 301146 970 10 00 BABY SAFE plus II 04 301146 970 20 00 970 36 00 Category I: 9 kg up to 18 kg between approx- imately 9 months and 4 years Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 04 301133 970 16 00 970 37 00 Category II/III: 15 kg up to 36 kg Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 19 00 970 38 00 KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00 Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category Weight cate- gory Size cate- gory Manufac- turer Type Approval num- ber (E1 ...) Order number with colour code 9H95 Category 0+: up to 13 kg E Britax Römer BABY SAFE plus 03 301146 04 301146 B6 6 86 8224 Category I: 9 kg up to 18 kg B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 03 301133 04 301133 A 000 970 1600 A 000 970 3700 i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from a smart centre. Further related subjects: RNotes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat (Y page 40). RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint systems (Y page 41). Pets in the vehicle G WARNING If you leave animals unsupervised or unsecured in the vehicle, they may push a button or a switch, for example. They could: Ractivate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Rswitch vehicle systems on or off, thus endangering other road users In the event of an accident, sudden braking or abrupt changes of direction, unsecured animals could be flung around the vehicle, injuring the vehicle occupants. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Pets in the vehicle 45

Safety. Z

Never leave animals unattended in the

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 53 · Applies to: 453

vehicle. Always secure animals correctly during a journey, e.g. in an animal trans- port box. Driving safely Driving safety system limitations ! Make sure you have suitable tyres, so that assistance systems and driving safety systems can work as effectively as possible. If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are inattentive, the driving safety systems can neither reduce the risk of accident nor override the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are merely aids designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop. Braking with ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that the wheels do not lock when you brake. This allows you to continue steering the vehicle when braking. When you switch on the ignition, the ! warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. It goes out after the engine is star- ted. ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS intervenes in the case of slippery road sur- faces, even when you only brake gently. X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal with force until the braking situation is over. X To make a full brake application: depress the brake pedal with full force. G WARNING If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. Additionally, further driving safety sys- tems are deactivated. There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Using the forward collision warning If a risk of collision with the vehicle in front is detected, the forward collision warning alerts the driver both visually and acousti- cally. The forward collision warning is activated when you start the engine. With the help of the radar sensor system, the forward collision warning can detect obsta- cles that are in the path of your vehicle for an extended period of time. Up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h, the forward collision warning can react to sta- tionary obstacles, such as stationary or parked vehicles. G WARNING The distance warning function does not react: Rto people or animals Rto oncoming vehicles Rto crossing traffic Rwhen cornering Thus, the distance warning function can- not provide a warning in all critical situa- tions. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. 46 Driving safely

Safety.

G WARNING

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 54 · Applies to: 453

The distance warning function cannot always clearly identify objects and com- plex traffic situations. In such cases, the distance warning func- tion may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the distance warning function alone. The · warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if: Rthe distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is insufficient Rthe vehicle is rapidly approaching a vehi- cle travelling in front or a stationary object. In this case, an intermittent warn- ing tone also sounds Detection can be restricted under the follow- ing conditions: Rthe vehicle is new or service work has been carried out on the system. In this case, observe the information on running-in the vehicle Rthe sensors are dirty or covered Rin heavy rain or snow Rinterference by other radar sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parks Rthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow, e.g. a motorcycle Rthe vehicle travelling in front is travelling on a different line Following any damage to the front end of the vehicle, have the configuration and opera- tion of the radar sensor checked at a quali- fied specialist workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow speeds where there is no visible damage to the front of the vehicle. X Press the switch symbol. On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. If the forward collision warning is deactivated, the indicator lamp lights up. Driving with ESP® ESP® supports the driver when pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta- bilise the vehicle during braking. ESP® com- prises ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Crosswind Assist. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one or more wheels are braked to stabilise the vehicle. ETS brakes the drive wheels individually if they spin. This enables you to pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for example if the road surface is slippery on one side. Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road- holding of your vehicle when driving straight ahead. Crosswind Assist reduces these impairments. Crosswind assist is active at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering gently. If ESP® intervenes, pull away carefully and adapt your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions. If the ÷ warning lamp goes out before beginning the journey, ESP® is active. If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. Driving safely 47

Safety. Z

G WARNING

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 55 · Applies to: 453

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Information on EBD (Electronic Brake- force Distribution) EBD monitors and controls the brake pres- sure on the rear wheels to improve driving stability while braking. G WARNING If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the risk of skidding and an acci- dent. You should therefore adapt your driving style to the different handling character- istics. Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 48 Driving safely

Safety.

Opening the door

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 56 · Applies to: 453

X Press the # button on the key. X Open the door. i After unlocking, open the vehicle within approximately 2 minutes to prevent it from locking itself and priming the anti-theft alarm system again. Correct driver's seat position G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. Observe the following rules on the correct driver's seat position: Rthe driver must be as far away from the driver's airbag as possible (Y page 33). Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt = properly. Rthe driver must be able to depress the ped- als properly. Rthe driver must be able to move their legs freely. Rthe driver must be able to reach steering wheel : with their arms slightly bent. Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis- plays in the instrument cluster clearly. Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost vertical position. Rsit in a normal upright position. Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your body. Rthe seat belt must be routed across the middle of your shoulder. Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints. Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors so that the driver has a good view of the road and traffic. Adjusting the seats Please note G WARNING If children adjust the seats, they could become trapped, especially if they are unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If the driver's seat is not correctly engaged, it could unexpectedly move while driving. This could cause you to lose con- trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Always ensure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. G WARNING When adjusting a seat, you or another vehicle occupant could become trapped by the guide rail of the seat, for instance. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat when adjusting it. Adjusting the seats 49

Entering and setting up. Z

G WARNING

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 57 · Applies to: 453

The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the backrest to an almost vertical position. When braking or in the event of an acci- dent, you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat- belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder. G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. ! Make sure that there are no objects in the footwell under or behind the seats when moving the seats back. There is a risk that the seats and/or the objects could be dam- aged. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" (Y page 34) and "Children in the vehicle" (Y page 36). Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi- tion Seat with a lever Seat with a handwheel To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, the seat belt must not be fastened. X Lift lever =. X Slide the seat forwards or backwards. The seat engages audibly. Adjusting the seat hight (seat with a lever only) X Pull handle ; up or push it down several times. Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a lever) X Pull lever : forwards. X At the same time, move the backrest for- wards or backwards. 50 Adjusting the seats

Entering and setting up.

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with a

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 58 · Applies to: 453

handwheel) X Turn handwheel ? forwards or back- wards. Adjusting the steering wheel G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING Children could become trapped by the steering wheel if they adjust it. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. X Fold down lever :. X Set desired steering wheel height 2. X Fold up lever :. X Check that the steering column is locked. Adjusting the mirrors Adjusting the interior mirror X Move the interior mirror up, down, left or right. Setting the interior mirror to anti-daz- zle mode X Fold lever : forwards. Adjusting the mirrors 51

Entering and setting up. Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 59 · Applies to: 453

ually G WARNING You could lose control of the vehicle while driving if you: Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror Rfasten the seat belt. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel or mirror and fasten the seat belt before starting the engine. G WARNING The steering wheel may move unexpect- edly if you adjust it while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that the steering wheel is locked before driving off. Never unlock the steer- ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the image. Objects visible in the mirrors are closer than they appear. You could mis- judge the distance from road users driving behind you when changing lanes, for instance. There is a risk of an accident. You should therefore always look over your shoulder to determine the actual distance from road users driving behind you. X Move lever : up, down, left or right. Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri- cally In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec- trically, the ignition must be switched on. X To select the left or right exterior mirror: turn control = left 1 or right 2. X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con- trol = up, down, left or right. 52 Adjusting the mirrors

Entering and setting up.

Running-in a new vehicle

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 60 · Applies to: 453

Running-in the engine with due care improves the engine's performance in later years. After 1500 km, the engine speed can be increased gradually. Also follow the notes on running-in when the engine or parts of the drive train have been replaced. In some drive and driving safety systems, the sensor system resets automatically after vehicle delivery or repairs. Full system effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in procedure. During the first 1500 km of the running-in period, note the following: X Drive at varying vehicle and engine speeds. X Avoid high engine loads, such as driving at full throttle. X Drive at a speed that is less than Ô the maximum speed. X Do not use the engine brake to brake. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not depress the accelerator beyond the pressure point (kickdown) X Vehicles with automatic transmission: ide- ally drive the vehicle in drive program E (Comfort). New brake pads/linings and discs only reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometres of driving. Therefore, note the following during the running-in period: X Drive carefully. X Brake more firmly. Starting the engine Please note G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poi- soning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ven- tilation. G WARNING Flammable materials introduced through environmental influence or by animals can ignite if in contact with the exhaust sys- tem or parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk of fire. Carry out regular checks to make sure that there are no flammable foreign materials in the engine compartment or in the exhaust system. G WARNING If you attach heavy or large objects to the key, the key could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This could cause the engine to be switched off. There is a risk of an accident. Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the key. Remove any bulky keyrings before inserting the key into the ignition lock. ! Do not depress the accelerator when starting the engine. Starting the engine 53

Driving. Z

u To insert the key into the ignition lock

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 61 · Applies to: 453

1 To switch on the power supply 2 To switch on the ignition 3 To start the engine Manual transmission X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. X Select neutral. X Insert the key into the ignition lock. X Turn the key to position 3. Automatic transmission X Depress the brake. X Turn the key to position 3. X Shift out of transmission position P. Pulling away Please note G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can impede pedal travel or block a pedal which is depressed. This jeopardises safe operation of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, so that they cannot reach the driver's foot- well. Make sure the floormats and carpets are properly secured so that they cannot slip and obstruct the pedals. Do not lay several floormats or carpets on top of one another. G WARNING Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage of the pedals, e.g.: Rshoes with thick soles Rshoes with high heels Rslippers There is a risk of an accident. Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct usage of the pedals. G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only avail- able with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steer- ing and the brake boosting effect. You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driv- ing. Note the following when pulling away: Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehi- cle is stationary. Rdo not drive with the parking brake applied. Ruse caution when pulling away on slippery surfaces. Rdo not allow tyres to spin. Ravoid excessive engine speeds and full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. Note the following on vehicles with auto- matic transmission: Rdepress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Rpress the release button on the selector lever. Rshift the selector lever to position D or R. 54 Pulling away

Driving.

Using the parking brake

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 62 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING If the parking brake has not been fully released when driving, the parking brake can: Roverheat and cause a fire Rlose its hold function. There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release the parking brake fully before driving off. G WARNING If you must brake the vehicle with the parking brake, the braking distance is considerably longer and the wheels could lock. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Only use the parking brake to brake the vehicle when the service brake is faulty. Do not apply the parking brake too firmly. If the wheels lock, release the parking brake until the wheels begin turning again. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Applying the parking brake X Pull parking brake ; upwards. The brake lights do not light up when you brake the vehicle with the parking brake. Releasing the parking brake X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Press release button : on parking brake ; and move the parking brake down to the stop. Hill start assist G WARNING After a while, hill start assist no longer holds the vehicle and it may roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist. Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in place when driving uphill as soon as the brake pedal is released. Hill start assist is only active in the follow- ing situations: Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slope Rwhen the parking brake is released Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the transmission is not in position N RESP® is functioning correctly. Pulling away 55

Driving. Z

X Release the brake pedal.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 63 · Applies to: 453

The vehicle is then held for about one sec- ond. X Pull away. Automatic start/stop system Useful information The automatic start/stop system automati- cally switches off the engine when the vehi- cle stops moving and starts it up again when pulling away. All vehicle systems except the air-conditioning system or automatic cli- mate control continue to operate during automatic engine switch-off. Indicator lamps of the automatic start/stop system Rè conditions fulfilled. The engine is switched off Rç conditions not fulfilled, the stop inhibitor is active The engine will not stop automatically. The engine stops automatically in the fol- lowing situations: Rthe automatic start/stop system is switched on Runder suitable outside temperatures Rthe engine is at normal operating temper- ature Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior has reached the set value Rthe battery is charged Rthe windscreen is not misted up (when the air conditioning is switched on) Rthe doors and tailgate are closed Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened Rreverse gear is not engaged The engine starts automatically in the fol- lowing situations: Rthe automatic start/stop system is switched off Rthe clutch pedal is depressed Rthe brake is depressed Rthe vehicle is rolling Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior dif- fers from the set temperature Rthe tailgate is opened Rthe windscreen is misted up Rthe battery charge is too low Switching off the engine automatically Manual transmission X Stop the vehicle. X Select neutral. X Release the clutch pedal. The engine is switched off. The è indi- cator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Automatic transmission X Stop the vehicle in transmission position D or N, even when shifting manually. The engine is switched off. The è indi- cator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Starting the engine automatically Manual transmission X Depress the clutch pedal. ! Vehicles with manual transmission: only engage gear when the clutch pedal is depressed. Automatic transmission X Release the brake pedal. Deactivating/activating the automatic start/stop system 56 Automatic start/stop system

Driving.

The automatic start/stop system is activated

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 64 · Applies to: 453

automatically when the engine is started.

X Press the

switch symbol.

On-board computer with colour display:

the display shows a message. The indica-

tor lamp lights up when the automatic

start/stop system is deactivated or there is

a malfunction.

Manual transmission

Shifting to neutral

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.

X Move the gear lever to position i.

Engaging a gear

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.

X Engage a gear.

Engaging reverse gear

! Only engage reverse gear with the engine

at idling speed and the vehicle stationary.

You could otherwise damage the manual

transmission.

X Depress the clutch pedal fully.

X Select neutral.

X smart66 kWturbo:pull the sleeve on the

gear lever upwards.

X Push the gear lever back to the right.

Automatic transmission

Please note

G WARNING

If the engine speed is above the idling

speed and you engage transmission posi-

tion D or R, the vehicle could pull away

suddenly. There is a risk of an accident.

When engaging transmission position D or

R, always firmly depress the brake pedal

and do not simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the auto-

matic transmission shifts into neutral

position N. The vehicle may roll away.

There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P before

switching off the engine. Secure the parked

vehicle against rolling away by applying

the parking brake.

In position D, the transmission automati-

cally selects the gears based on the following

criteria:

Rselected drive program

Rposition of the accelerator pedal

Rspeed driven

Transmission position display

Transmission position display ; Drive program display Automatic transmission 57

Driving. Z

The following transmission positions are

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 65 · Applies to: 453

available: RB Park position Park position secures a vehicle from roll- ing away when stationary, but should not be used as a parking brake. Only shift to position P when the vehicle is stationary. Apply the parking brake. RC Reverse gear Only shift to position R when the vehicle is stationary. RA Neutral No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive wheels. Only shift to position N when the vehicle is stationary. R7 Drive The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All forward gears are avail- able. Changing the transmission position B Park position with parking lock C Reverse gear A Neutral 7 Drive The ignition must be switched on in order to shift the transmission to positions P, N or R. To shift the transmission from position P, you must also depress the brake pedal. X Press release knob :. X Shift the selector lever to the desired transmission position. Maximum acceleration (kickdown) To reach maximum acceleration, use kick- down: X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the desired speed is reached. The automatic transmission shifts to a higher gear. Selecting drive programs Two drive programs are available with dif- ferent characteristics. The automatic trans- mission switches to drive program E every time the engine is started. Drive program E (Comfort) is characterised by the following: Rcomfortable driving style Roptimum fuel consumption through early upshifting Rdriving at low engine speeds; the wheels are less likely to spin Drive program S (Dynamic) is characterised by the following: Rdynamic, active driving style Rlate upshifting Rpossibly higher fuel consumption X Press program selector button :. The letter of the selected drive program appears in the display. 58 Automatic transmission

Driving.

Changing gear manually

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 66 · Applies to: 453

Useful information On vehicles with an automatic transmission, you can shift gears manually using the selector lever or shift paddles. If it is per- missible, the automatic transmission shifts to the next highest or next lowest gear. When manual shifting is activated, the cur- rent gear is shown in the display. Two options are available for manual shift- ing: Rpermanent manual gearshifting Rshort-term manual gearshifting (vehicles with Sports package) Permanent manual gearshifting Activating X Shift the gear selector lever to position D. X Push the selector lever to the left. Deactivating X Push the selector lever to the right. Short-term manual gearshifting (vehi- cles with Sports package) Activating X Shift the gear selector lever to position D. X Press shift paddle : or ;. The short-term setting remains active for a certain length of time. Under certain condi- tions this minimum amount of time is increased, e.g. when driving up a steep slope. Deactivating X Press and hold shift paddle ;. Shifting with the selector lever Shifting up X Push the selector lever in the W direc- tion. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Downshifting X Push the selector lever in the X direc- tion. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. Automatic transmission 59

Driving. Z

When coasting, the automatic transmission

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 67 · Applies to: 453

shifts down. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Shifting with shift paddles (vehicles with Sports package) Shifting up X Press shift paddle ;. The automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear. Downshifting X Press shift paddle :. The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear. When coasting, the automatic transmission shifts down. If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against engine dam- age by not shifting down. Using the turn signals The ignition must be switched on in order to use the turn signals. X To indicate: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2 (left) past the point of resistance. X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance. The turn signal flashes three times. Driving economically Notes on economical driving H Environmental note CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which sci- entists believe to be principally responsi- ble for global warming (the greenhouse effect). Your vehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related to fuel consumption and therefore depend on: Refficient use of the fuel by the engine Rdriving style Rother non-technical factors, such as environmental influences, road condi- tions or traffic flow You can minimise your vehicle's CO2 emis- sions by driving carefully and having it serviced regularly. Conservative driving and regular vehicle maintenance help minimise CO2 emissions. i Only for certain countries: you can find the current consumption and emission values of your vehicle in the COC docu- 60 Driving economically

Driving.

ments (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 68 · Applies to: 453

These documents are delivered with your vehicle. The consumption figures were in each case based on the currently applicable version: Rfor vehicles that comply with or exceed the EURO 5 standard, in accordance with Regulation (EC) No. 715/2007 Deviations from these values may occur under normal operating conditions. Recommendations for driving economically: Rmake sure the tyre pressures are correct. Ravoid unnecessary loads. Rwarm up the engine while driving at low engine speeds. Rvehicles with manual transmission: change to a higher gear in good time. Rvehicles with automatic transmission: drive the vehicle in drive program E (Com- fort). Raccelerate moderately. Rdrive with care. Rrelease the accelerator pedal in good time. Rallow the vehicle to coast without using the brakes. Rhave maintenance work carried out at the specified service intervals. H Environmental note Avoid excessive engine speeds. This unnecessarily increases the fuel con- sumption of your vehicle and harms the environment as a result of increased emis- sions. Monitoring the rev counter Rev counter and dashboard clock Rev counter : with dashboard clock ; can be adjusted to the left or right. Overrevving range The overrevving range of the engine is shown with dashed lines in the orange marking of rev counter :. The fuel supply is interrup- ted to protect the engine when the overrev- ving range is reached. X Regularly check the engine speed while driving. X If a high engine speed is displayed, shift up a gear. Gearshift recommendations The gearshift recommendations assist you in adopting an economical driving style. Monochrome display (manual transmission) Driving economically 61

Driving. Z

Monochrome display (automatic transmission,

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 69 · Applies to: 453

manual gearshifting) Colour display (manual transmission) Colour display (automatic transmission, man- ual gearshifting) X Depending on gearshift recommenda- tion :, shift up or down a gear. Understanding the eco score display in the on-board computer Useful information The eco score display provides information on how to drive economically. A higher percentage indicates a more eco- nomical driving style. The percentage count in the eco score dis- play only appears after covering a distance of approx. 400 m. If the ignition remains switched off for longer than 4 hours, the eco score display will be reset. Monochrome display Colour display The percentage in the eco score display is calculated using the following categories: Raccelerate: the value increases with moderate acceleration. Ranticipatory: the value increases when unnecessary acceleration and decelera- tion is avoided. RVehicles with manual transmission: shift: the value increases when gearshift rec- ommendations in the display are followed. 62 Driving economically

Driving.

Using the eco score display in the smart

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 70 · Applies to: 453

Media-System

Calling up the eco score menu

X Select Vehicle > eco score.

Evaluating the current trip

X Select Current trip .

The following rating information and val-

ues appear:

RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐

tory and shift

RDistance covered

RTotal eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

X Select Current trip > Save.

X Select the category under which you want

to save the trip.

The values for the current trip will be

added to the category selected and the

current trip will be reset. In the instrument

cluster, the trip computer values will be

returned to “From reset”.

Comparing the current trip with the

saved trips from a category

Last trip saved in this category ; Average value for the category = Best trip in the category X Select Current trip > W > Compare. X Select category. A comparison of the values for the current trip with the values of the selected cate- gory appears. X Select the comparison value :, ; or =. The current trip is compared to the respec- tive comparison value from the category. Resetting the current trip data X Select Current trip > Reset. X Select Yes. In the instrument cluster, the trip com- puter values will be returned to “From reset”. Activating/deactivating eco score after a trip X To activate: select Current trip > W > Show eco score after trip. X To deactivate: select Current trip > W > Hide eco score after trip. Displaying eco score for saved trips in a category X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips. X Select category. eco score contains the following compari- son values for each category: RSummary RLast value RAverage value RBest value The following types of evaluations are available for the Last trip saved cate- gory: RSummary RDetailed report Renaming a category At least one trip must be stored in the respec- tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Rename this category. Driving economically 63

Driving. Z

Resetting the eco score of one category

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 71 · Applies to: 453

At least one trip must be stored in the respec- tive category. X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐ red trips > W > Reset this category. Braking correctly Please note G WARNING The braking system can overheat if you leave your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This increases the braking dis- tance and could even cause the braking system to fail. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not simultaneously depress both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal while driving. G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skid- ding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Braking on steep downhill gradients The engine's braking effect reduces the load on the brake system. X On long and steep downhill gradients, downshift to a lower gear in good time. Braking on wet road surfaces There may be a delayed brake response when driving on wet roads, after driving through a car wash or after driving through deep water. X Maintain a greater distance from the vehi- cle in front. X Brake more firmly. Braking on salt-treated roads When driving on salt-treated roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and pads. This increases the vehicle's braking dis- tance. X In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the brakes occasionally while pay- ing attention to the traffic conditions. X Brake carefully at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey. X Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle in front. Driving on wet roads Aquaplaning Regardless of driving style and tyre tread depths, aquaplaning can occur on the road. Adapt your driving style as follows: X Reduce the speed. X Brake carefully. X Avoid sudden steering movements X Avoid tyre ruts. Fording ! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling in front or in the opposite direction create waves. This may cause the maximum per- missible water depth to be exceeded. These notes must be observed under all circumstances. You could otherwise dam- age the engine, the electronics or the transmission. Observe the following when driving through standing water: X Do not drive through water that is higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. X Drive at walking pace. 64 Driving on wet roads

Driving.

Winter driving

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 72 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. This increases the risk of skid- ding and having an accident. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. G DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or sufficient ventilation is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehicle. This is the case, for example, if the vehicle gets stuck in snow. There is a risk of fatal injury. If you have to leave the engine running, keep the exhaust pipe and the area around the vehicle free of snow. Open a window on the leeward side of the vehicle to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. X Before the start of winter, have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snow chains. X Drive carefully and avoid sudden acceler- ation, turning and braking on slippery road surfaces. X Do not use cruise control. X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer- ing actions to counteract the movement. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: if the vehicle skids, shift the transmission to position N. X Do not use the outside temperature display as a way to determine if conditions are icy. X Observe the road surface. Lane Keeping Assist Please note G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly identify lane markings. In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep in lane, espe- cially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. G WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not return the vehicle to the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler- ate the vehicle yourself, especially if Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic and visual warning when a vehicle unintention- ally leaves the lane. Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which is located on the windscreen behind the rear- view mirror. Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi- cle in its lane. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and staying within the lane. Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or fail to respond under the following conditions: Rpoor visibility Rstrong glaring light Rdirty windscreen in the camera area Runclear or broken lane markings Rvery narrow and winding roads Rhighly variable shade conditions on the road When the turn signal is set, warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Lane Keeping Assist 65

Driving. Z

No warning is given in the following situa-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 73 · Applies to: 453

tions: Rwhen crossing a lane marking quickly Rat speeds below 70 km/h Activating and deactivating Lane Keeping Assist X Press the switch symbol. On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. The indica- tor lamp also lights up when Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. The ¸ symbol appears in the display when Lane Keeping Assist is activated. At speeds above 70 km/h, Lane Keeping Assist is ready for use and the ¤ symbol appears. On vehicles with a colour display, the ¸ symbol lights up green. Cruise control and limiter Please note G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and this differs from your current speed, the vehi- cle will accelerate. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle can accelerate unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci- dent. Before you call up the stored speed, pay attention to traffic conditions. If you do not know the stored speed, store the desired speed again. Cruise control is used in order to drive longer at a constant speed. The limiter helps to avoid exceeding a stored speed. The driver is responsible for driving the vehicle in a safe manner, controlling the vehicle speed and braking in good time. The two driver assist systems require the following: Rfavourable weather and good visibility Rgood road and traffic conditions The cruise control and limiter systems do not brake automatically. RReduce the vehicle speed by applying the brakes. ROn long and steep downhill gradients, downshift to a lower gear in good time. Cruise control is interrupted when the fol- lowing occur: Rbraking (including the parking brake) Raccelerating RESP® intervention On an uphill gradient or when accelerating briefly, cruise control may interrupt speed regulation. Afterwards, the set speed is applied again. On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceed the set speed. In this case, the stored speed flashes in the display and a warning tone sounds. Cruise control is ready for use at speeds above 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of 30 km/h and over can be set as the maximum speed. Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa- ted at the same time. Activating cruise control or the limiter 66 Cruise control and limiter

Driving.

X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 74 · Applies to: 453

iter) of button :. The ¯ (cruise control) or È (limiter) button appears in the instrument cluster display. Storing the current speed X Press button ; (®). Limiter:the stored speed appears next to the È symbol in the instrument cluster display. X Cruise control:release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle automatically main- tains the stored speed. The stored speed appears next to the ¯ symbol in the instrument cluster display. If there is a change of drivers, inform the new driver of the speed stored. Adjusting the stored speed X Press (+) or (-) button ; repeatedly until the desired speed is reached. Interrupting cruise control and the limiter X Press button ? (±). The stored speed can be accessed again later. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Calling up the stored speed X Press button = (°). X Cruise control:release the accelerator pedal. Deactivating cruise control or the lim- iter X Press button : to OFF centre position. The ¯ or È symbol in the instrument cluster display goes out. The stored speed is deleted. The stored speed is deleted when the engine is switched off. Refuelling Refuelling notes G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refuelling. G WARNING Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a danger of injury. Do not swallow fuel or let it come into con- tact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapours. Keep fuels out of the reach of children. If you or others come into contact with fuel, observe the following: RWash the fuel off any affected areas of skin with water and soap immediately. RIf you get fuel in your eyes, rinse them thoroughly with clean water immedi- ately. Seek immediate medical attention. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek immediate medical attention. Do not induce vomit- ing. RChange any clothing that has come into contact with fuel immediately. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a petrol engine. Do not switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel can result in damage to the fuel sys- tem and the engine. Notify a qualified spe- cialist workshop and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. ! The BRABUS engine is designed for unleaded fuel with a minimum octane rat- Refuelling 67

Driving. Z

ing of 98 RON/88 MON. In countries where

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 75 · Applies to: 453

unleaded fuel with a minimum octane rat- ing of 98 RON is not available, you can use unleaded fuel with an octane rating of 95 RON in emergencies. This may reduce engine performance and increase fuel con- sumption. When transporting a heavy load, using fuel with 95 RON may result in engine damage. smart recommends that you always operate your vehicle (petrol engine) with unleaded fuel which has a minimum octane rating of 98 RON/88 MON. ! Only refuel using unleaded petrol with at least 95 RON, which conforms to the Euro- pean standard EN 228 or E DIN or an equiv- alent specification. Fuel of this specification may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. You may refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel. Fuel that does not conform to EN 228 can lead to increased wear as well as damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust sys- tem. ! Only use the fuel recommended. Operat- ing the vehicle with other fuels can lead to damage to the fuel system, engine and exhaust system. ! Operation of the engine with fuel addi- tives added later can cause engine dam- age. Therefore, do not mix any fuel addi- tives with the fuel. This does not include additives for the removal and prevention of residue build-up. Petrol must only be mixed with additives recommended by smart. Observe the instructions for use in the product description. For further infor- mation on recommended additives enquire at any smart centre. ! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can. The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system could otherwise be blocked by par- ticles from the fuel can. ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted surfaces. You could otherwise damage the paintwork. For further information on fuel and fuel quality (Y page 190). The available fuel grade in some countries may be inadequate. In this case, add the rec- ommended additives. Observe the notes and mixing ratios specified on the container. For BRABUS vehicles: only refuel using unleaded super grade petrol with an octane rating of at least 98 RON/88 MON if you want maximum performance from the engine. In emergencies you can also use unleaded pet- rol with an octane rating of at least 95 RON/85 MON. The arrow of symbol 8 shows the position of the fuel filler cap in the instrument cluster display. Refuelling G WARNING Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and thereby ignite fuel vapours. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. This discharges any electrostatic charge that may have built up. Do not get into the vehicle again during the refuelling process. There is a risk of creating an electrostatic charge. = Fuel type instruction label X Switch off the engine. X Remove the key from the ignition lock. X Open fuel filler flap : in the direction of the arrow. X Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise and remove it from the filler neck. X Hang the fuel filler cap on the hook on the inside of fuel filler flap ;. 68 Refuelling

Driving.

X Insert the filler neck of the fuel pump noz-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 76 · Applies to: 453

zle all the way into the tank and refuel. X Only fill the fuel tank until the pump noz- zle switches off. The fuel may otherwise leak out. Overfilling the fuel tank can dam- age the fuel system. X Replace the fuel filler cap on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. X Close the fuel filler flap. Refuelling 69

Driving. Z

Switching on the lighting

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 77 · Applies to: 453

Useful information

The driver must ensure that the light set-

tings match the current weather, light and

traffic conditions.

For reasons of safety, smart recommends that

you drive with the lights switched on even

during the daytime.

A warning tone sounds if the lights are still

on when you leave the vehicle.

In some countries, operation of the head-

lamps varies due to legal requirements and

self-imposed obligations.

Combination switch control ; Marking Activating automatic headlamp mode G WARNING When the light switch is set to Ã, the dipped-beam headlamps may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility due to the weather conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an accident. In such situations, turn the light switch to L. While the engine is running, the light setting is selected automatically according to the brightness of the ambient light. à con- trols the daytime driving lights, side lamps and dipped-beam headlamps. The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's lighting at all times. X Turn combination switch control : to the à position. The lights go out automatically in the fol- lowing situations: RThe engine is switched off. RThe driver's door is opened. RThe vehicle is locked. RThe main-beam headlamps are not switched on when the vehicle is station- ary. Switching on the dipped-beam head- lamps X Turn combination switch control : to the L position. The L indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster. Switching the main-beam headlamps on or off The engine must be running. X Turn the combination switch control to the à or K position. X To switch on: press the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. X To switch off: move the combination switch back to its original position. The K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the main-beam head- lamps are switched on. 70 Switching on the lighting

Ensuring good visibility.

Using the headlamp flasher

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 78 · Applies to: 453

X Pull the combination switch in the direc-

tion of arrow 2.

Switching on the side lamps

X Turn combination switch control : to the

T position.

Switching on the foglamps and rear

foglamps

Only vehicles with front foglamps have the

"Foglamps" function.

Combination switch middle ring ; Marking The side lamps or dipped-beam headlamps must be switched on. X Turn combination switch middle ring : to the desired marking: RO Foglamps RR Rear foglamp After releasing, the combination switch mid- dle ring returns automatically to the neutral position. The foglamps and rear foglamps go out auto- matically in the following situations: Rthe lights are switched off. Rthe engine is switched off and the control is in the à position. Using the cornering light function Only vehicles with front foglamps have the "Use cornering lights" function. The cornering light function uses the front foglamps to improve the illumination of the road in the direction in which you are turn- ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends, for example. The following conditions must be fulfilled for the cornering light function to switch on automatically: RThe dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. RThe vehicle is moving at less than 40 km/h. RThe turn signal is switched on or the steer- ing wheel is turned. Adjusting the lighting Adjusting the headlamp range The vehicle load can affect the headlamp range. This can impair visibility, and the headlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic. The ignition must be switched on in order to set the headlamp range. X Turn the M headlamp range control to the position which corresponds to the load in your vehicle. Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's seat and front-passenger seat occupied R1: Other loading On-board computer with colour display: the display shows a message. Adjusting the dipped-beam headlamps to left-hand and right-hand traffic The symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps are required when travelling in countries where vehicles are driven on the opposite Adjusting the lighting 71

Ensuring good visibility. Z

side of the road to that in which the vehicle is

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 79 · Applies to: 453

registered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped- beam headlamps, these headlamps do not dazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps provide less illu- mination to the edge of the carriageway. X Open the service cover. X Turn the screws of both headlamps as far as they will go in the X direction for the symmetrical dipped-beam setting and in the W direction for the asymmetrical dipped-beam setting. X Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting checked at a qualified specialist work- shop. Using the interior lighting Switching the interior lighting on and off The interior lights go on when you unlock the doors. The interior lights switch off in the following situations: RA door is opened and 15 minutes have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been locked and 15 seconds have passed. RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not been locked and 4 minutes have passed. RThe engine has been started. The interior lighting can be activated when a door is open. After closing the doors, the interior lighting goes out. X Press switch : to activate or deactivate the left-hand reading lamp. X Move switch ; to the desired position: Rinterior lighting switched on Rinterior lighting controlled automati- cally Rinterior lighting switched off X Press switch = to activate or deactivate the right-hand reading lamp. Adjusting the ambient lighting (colour display) On-board computer with colour display: the ambient lighting is set in the on-board com- puter (Y page 92). Using the windscreen wipers Switching on the windscreen wipers Please note ! Do not operate the windscreen wipers when the windscreen is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has collected on the windscreen can scratch the glass if wiping takes place when the windscreen is dry. If it is necessary to switch on the wind- screen wipers in dry weather conditions, always operate them using washer fluid. ! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind- screen becomes dirty in dry weather con- ditions, the windscreen wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could dam- age the windscreen wiper blades or scratch the windscreen. 72 Using the windscreen wipers

Ensuring good visibility.

For this reason, you should always switch

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 80 · Applies to: 453

off the windscreen wipers in dry weather.

! Make sure that the windscreen wipers are

free of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor may

overheat.

Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear.

smart recommends replacing the wiper

blades twice a year. Worn or damaged wiper

blades cause smearing on the windscreen. On

vehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions are

then possible.

Switching continuous wipe on and off

Control for wipe frequency To operate the windscreen wiper, the igni- tion must be switched on. X Press the combination switch down or up to the desired position: R1 Continuous wipe, slow R2 Continuous wipe, fast In position 2, the wipe frequency is reduced if the engine is switched off automatically. In position 1 or in the © position, the windscreen wipers switch off when the engine is switched off automatically and the driver's door is opened. Automatic wipe (vehicles with rain sen- sor) The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver is responsible for ensuring good visibility at all times. X Press the combination switch to the à position. In automatic wipe mode, the appropriate wiping frequency is set according to the intensity of the rain. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Switching on intermittent wiping X Press the combination switch to the à position. X Use control : to set the wipe frequency. Wiping with washer fluid X Pull the combination switch in the direc- tion of arrow î. Switching the rear window wiper on and off (smart fortwo coupé) To operate the rear window wiper, the igni- tion must be switched on. X Turn the outer control on the combination switch to the desired position: R$ Rear window wiper off Rè Rear window wiper on Rî Wipes with washer fluid Switching the rear window wiper on and off when in reverse gear (smart fortwo coupé) You can switch the "Automatic rear window wiper when reversing" setting on or off in the smart Media-System. This setting briefly operates the rear window wiper automati- cally when the ignition and the windscreen wipers are switched on and reverse gear is engaged. X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle

Settings > Auto rear wipe with reverse gear. The selected setting is highlighted. X Confirm the setting with Done. Using the windscreen wipers 73

Ensuring good visibility. Z

Folding the sun visor to the side

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 81 · Applies to: 453

Mirror cover ; Bracket = Retaining strap ? Vanity mirror X Fold the sun visor down. X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;. X Fold the sun visor to one side 74 Folding the sun visor to the side

Ensuring good visibility.

Locking and unlocking the doors from

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 82 · Applies to: 453

the inside Using the door handle to unlock the door X Pull door handle :. If the vehicle has previously been locked with the key, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. X To lock: press button :. When the doors are locked, indicator lamp ; lights up. X To unlock: press button :. Activating and deactivating the auto- matic locking feature The activated automatic locking feature locks the vehicle automatically when the ignition is switched on and the vehicle is moving. X When the engine is running, press and hold button : for 5 seconds until a tone sounds. When the automatic locking function is activated, the locking mechanism engages audibly when you pull away. When the automatic locking function is deactivated, no sound occurs. Activating the double-lock function For England only: the double-lock function prevents the doors from being opened from the inside. G WARNING When the double locks are activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. People in the vehicle can no longer get out, e.g. in hazardous situations. There is a risk of injury. Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside 75

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

Therefore, do not leave any people unsu-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 83 · Applies to: 453

pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil- dren, elderly people or people in need of special assistance. Do not activate the double lock when people are in the vehicle. G WARNING If persons (particularly children) are exposed to heat or cold for a prolonged period, there is a risk of serious or even fatal injuries. Never leave persons (par- ticularly children) unattended in the vehi- cle. X Press button : twice. The double-lock function is enabled. Understanding the reversing function The side windows are equipped with an auto- matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks or restricts a side window from clos- ing during automatic operation, the side window opens again automatically. During the manual closing process, the side window only opens again automatically after the corresponding switch is released. The auto- matic reversing feature is only an aid. The driver is responsible for operating the side windows safely. G WARNING The reversing function does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rwhile resetting This means that the reversing feature can- not prevent someone being trapped in these situations. There is a risk of injury. When closing, make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Opening and closing the windows Please note G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If some- body becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. G WARNING Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING If you close a side window again immedi- ately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or max- imum force. The reversing function is then not active. Parts of the body could be trap- ped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing proc- ess, release the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window. The switches for both side windows are loca- ted on the driver's door. There is also a switch for the front-passenger window on the front- passenger door. The switch on the driver’s door takes precedence. 76 Opening and closing the windows

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Opening and closing the windows

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 84 · Applies to: 453

Left side window ; Right side window X To open: press the switch. X To close: pull the switch. Opening and closing windows fully in automatic mode X To open the windows fully, press the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To close the windows fully, pull the switch beyond the point of resistance and release it. X To stop automatic operation, press the switch again. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) Please note G WARNING During opening and closing of the folding top or rear soft top, body parts may become trapped for example, by the roof mechan- ical system. There is a risk of injury. Ensure that no parts of the body are in the immediate vicinity of moving parts during the closing or opening process. Release the switch immediately if somebody becomes trapped. ! When transporting long objects in the vehicle interior, make sure that these do not press against the folding roof when it is closed. When transporting objects that extend beyond the rear, make sure that these do not rest on the rear soft top fasteners (brackets). During loading, make sure that objects with sharp edges do not come into contact with the soft top or the rear win- dow. If the rear soft top is lowered, do not dis- tribute a weight in excess of 75 kg on top of it. Make sure that the third brake lamp is not covered. ! Make sure that the lock openings of the soft-top system are not blocked. Stow the side spars only in the intended stowage compartment in the tailgate. ! Make sure that objects in the luggage compartment are not stacked too high. They could otherwise be damaged when the rear soft top is opened or closed. The procedure for removing, fitting and stowing the side bars is described below. The QR code is a link to a video clip that demon- strates the procedure. Opening and closing the soft top To open or close the soft top, the ignition must be switched on. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 77

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

X To open: press the switch to position ;

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 85 · Applies to: 453

until the soft top is in the desired position. Press switch ; again to fully open the soft top. X To close: press the switch to position : until the soft top is in the desired position. It is possible to open or close the soft top while driving up to the maximum design speed. In poor weather and at high speeds, it is possible that electric locking when closing is not reliable. If this is the case you must reduce the speed and, if necessary, press the switch again to close the soft top. Removing the side bars X Open the soft top X Open the doors and tailgate. X To release: slide lever : back. The side bar is unlocked. X Push lever : back again and remove side bars ;. Stowing the side bars G WARNING If you transport the side bars without securing them, they may be thrown around in the event of an accident, braking or sud- den changes in direction. There is a risk of injury. Always stow the side bars in the designa- ted stowage well and close the stowage well lid. ! When the rear soft top is lowered, the side support beams could be stolen. Therefore, remove the side support beams and stow them in the luggage compartment or close the soft top. ! If you load the stowage space it could be damaged. Never stow heavy objects on the stowage space or sit on it. Please note: Ronly use the stowage space to store the side bars Ralways place both side bars in the stowage space Observe the notice on the stowage space. X Release fastening straps : on the stowage space and guide the locking mechanism with your hand until the fastening straps are released. X Open cover ;. X Store the side bars as shown (observe markings L and R on the side bars and the stowage compartment for the left and right side bars): 78 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

: Side bar, front left

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 86 · Applies to: 453

; Side bar, rear left = Side bar, front right ? Side bar, rear right X Close the cover. The cover must audibly engage. X Secure both fastening straps with ten- sioner : on rear detent ;. The red surfaces at the side must no longer be visible. An audible click can be heard upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. X If the tailgate does not close properly, check if the side bars have been stored as specified. Fitting the side bars G WARNING If the side bars are incorrectly mounted they may become loose during the journey and endanger other road users. There is a risk of accident and injury. Mount the side bars as described. X Open the doors and tailgate. X Release the fastening straps on the stow- age space and guide the locking mecha- nism with your hand until the fastening straps are released. X Open the cover. X Remove the side bars. X Insert the side bar from the stowage com- partment marked L on the left side at the front end :. X Press down rear end of side bar ; until it engages twice. X Fit the side bar from the stowage compart- ment marked R on the right-hand side. Closing the stowage space without the side bars X Move folding mechanism : in the direc- tion of the arrow. X Close cover ;. Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 79

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

X Secure both fastening straps with ten-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 87 · Applies to: 453

sioner : on front detent ;. The red surfaces at the side must no longer be visible. An audible click can be heard upon engaging. X Close the tailgate. Operating the climate control system Useful information The climate control system is only available when the engine is running. If the climate control system is deactivated, the air supply and circulation are switched off. The windows could mist up. You should therefore switch off the climate control sys- tem for brief periods only. In air-recirculation mode, only the air inside the vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air is introduced. This is useful in a tunnel or when there are unpleasant odours outside the vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the win- dows may mist up more quickly, particularly when the outside temperature is low. There- fore, switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. If the automatic start/stop system switches the engine off, the air inside the vehicle will not be air-conditioned or dehumidified. The windows can mist up more quickly. If the windows mist up, deactivate the automatic start/stop system. The engine starts again. The integrated filter in the climate control system keeps out most particles of dust as well as pollen. The filter reduces the amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior. For this reason, you should always observe the inter- val for replacing the filter. Operating the heating and air-condi- tioning Switching on and off The engine must be running in order to oper- ate the heating and air-conditioning system. X To switch on: turn control = clockwise. X To switch off: turn control = to position 0. Setting the temperature X Turn control A in small increments clock- wise or anti-clockwise. Setting the air distribution X Turn control : to the desired position: Rz Demister vents Ra Demister vents and footwell vents RO Footwell vents RN Centre, side and footwell vents RP Centre and side air vents Increasing or decreasing the blower speed X Turn control = clockwise or anti-clock- wise. Activating/deactivating air-recircula- tion mode X To switch on: slide control B to the left to the t position. X To switch off: slide control B to the right to the u position. 80 Operating the climate control system

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 88 · Applies to: 453

cation" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The engine must be running in order to use "Cooling with air dehumidification". X Press button ;. In damp weather, switch off the "Cooling with air dehumidification" only briefly, otherwise the windows will mist up faster. Demisting the windscreen X Turn control : to the z position. X Turn control = to position 4. X Turn control A clockwise as far as it will go. X Slide control B to the right. Use this setting only until the windscreen is clear again. Demisting the rear window When the rear window heating is activated, the exterior mirrors are also heated. X Press button ?. The indicator lamp in the button is lit when the rear window heating is activated. Use this setting only until the rear window is clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the inside X Press button ;. X If the windows continue to mist up, turn control : to z. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the outside X Switch on the windscreen wipers. X Turn control : to z. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Operating the automatic climate con- trol Switching on and off The engine must be running in order to oper- ate the automatic climate control system. X To switch on: press the à button. The indicator lamps below à and ¿ light up. X To deactivate: press the ^ button. The indicator lamp below ^ lights up. Setting the temperature X Move the slider in small increments to the left or right. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained at a constant level. The air dis- tribution and blower speed are regulated automatically. Switching the air distribution on and off X Press one or more of the ¯, P, O buttons. R¯ Demister vents RP Centre and side air vents RO Footwell vents Increasing the blower speed X Press the K button. Decreasing the blower speed X Press the I button. Operating the climate control system 81

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 89 · Applies to: 453

tion mode X Press the À button. The indicator lamp below À lights up when air-recirculation mode is activated. Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi- cation" on or off The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cools and dehumidifies the air inside the vehicle during warm weather. The engine must be running in order to use "Cooling with air dehumidification". X To switch on: press the K and ¿ button. The indicator lamp below ¿ lights up when the function is activated. In damp weather switch off the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function only briefly, otherwise the windows will mist up faster. Demisting the windscreen X Press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp below ¬ lights up when the windscreen is demisted. Use this setting only until the windscreen is clear again. Demisting the rear window When the rear window heating is activated, the exterior mirrors are also heated. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp below ¤ lights up when the rear window heating is activated. Use this setting only until the rear window is clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the inside X Press the ¿ button. X Press the à button. X If the windows are still misted up, press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Drying windows that are misted up on the outside X Switch on the windscreen wipers. X Press the ¬ button. Use this setting only until the windows are clear again. Adjusting the air vents Please note G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to another area of the vehicle inte- rior. G WARNING If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectant into the vehicle's ventilation system, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire. Never spray these or other agents into the ventilation system. Always have work on the ventilation system carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Keep the following rules in mind for optimal climate control: RKeep the air slots between the service cover and windscreen clear of blockages. RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior. ROpen the air vents fully. 82 Operating the climate control system

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Opening and closing the air vents

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 90 · Applies to: 453

X To open 1: turn the vent outwards. X To close 2: turn the vent inwards. Directing the air vents X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, to the left or to the right as desired. Switching the seat heating on and off G WARNING If you repeatedly switch on seat heating, the seat cushion and backrest padding may become very hot. The health of vehicle occupants with limited temperature sen- sitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury. Therefore, do not switch on the seat heat- ing repeatedly. The seat heating only works when the igni- tion is switched on. X Press button ;. Indicator lamp : lights up when seat heating is activated. The seat heating switches off automatically after about 10 minutes. Using the accessories Using the cigarette lighter G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga- rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to objects, for example There is a risk of fire and injury. Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is out of reach of children. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. The cigarette lighter only works when the ignition is switched on. X Press cigarette lighter :. When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops up automatically. Using the ash tray ! The cup holder in the centre console is not heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga- rettes in the ashtray, make sure that the Using the accessories 83

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior. Z

ashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 91 · Applies to: 453

Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall into the cup holder. Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam- aged. X To open: lift up cover :. X To close: push down cover :. X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out. X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup holder. Using the 12 V socket X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Lift up the cover of socket :. X Connect device. The socket can be used for accessories up to a maximum draw of 120 W (15 A). If you use the socket for very long periods when the engine is switched off, the 12 V battery may discharge. Fitting and removing the floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell may restrict the clearance around the pedals or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehi- cle. There is a risk of an accident. Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so that they do not get into the driver's foot- well. Always fit the floormats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floormats and do not place several floormats on top of one another. X Slide the driver's seat backwards. X To install: press securing knobs : onto retainers ;. X To remove: release securing knobs : from retainers ;. 84 Using the accessories

Feeling comfortable in the vehicle interior.

Parking

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 92 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into con- tact with hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust gas flow. There is a risk of fire. Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. In particular, do not park on dry grassland or harvested grain fields. G WARNING If you leave children unattended in the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine In addition, they may operate vehicle equipment and become trapped. There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. G WARNING When the engine is switched off, the auto- matic transmission shifts into neutral position N. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. Always shift to parking position P before switching off the engine. Secure the parked vehicle against rolling away by applying the parking brake. ! Always secure the vehicle correctly against rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi- cle or its drivetrain could be damaged. Switching off the engine X Apply the parking brake. X Manual transmission: engage first or reverse gear. X Automatic transmission: shift the trans- mission to position P. X Turn key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels towards the kerb. Using the parking aid Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. The electronic parking aid gives an acoustic indication of the distance between the vehi- cle and an obstacle behind it. The parking aid uses three sensors : in the rear bumper to monitor the area around the vehicle. The parking aid measures the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle. If the proximity to the object behind the vehicle is less than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued. If the object is less than 30 cm away, a contin- uous warning tone is issued. The parking aid might not function correctly under the following circumstances: Ron uneven terrain Rif there are obstacles below or above the sensor detection range Using the parking aid 85

Parking and getting out. Z

Rnear snow or objects that absorb ultra-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 93 · Applies to: 453

sonic waves Rclose to sources of strong ultrasonic radi- ation, such as pneumatic drills If you engage reverse gear while the engine is running, the parking aid is activated. Deactivating/activating the parking aid X Press the switch symbol. The indicator lamp lights up when the parking aid is deactivated. Using the reversing camera Useful information ! Pay attention to people and obstacles when manoeuvring or parking the car. The driver is responsible in these situations. ! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged, consult a qualified specialist workshop and have the reversing camera checked. The reversing camera is a visual parking and manoeuvring aid. It shows the area behind your vehicle with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. Reversing camera : is located above the licence plate in the tailgate. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image in the smart Media-System dis- play. The reversing camera might show a distorted view of obstacles or show them incorrectly or not at all if: Rthe obstacle is very close to the rear bumper Rthe obstacle is underneath the rear bumper Rthe obstacle is close to the tailgate handle Rthe reversing camera is covered by addi- tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rack The function of the reversing camera might be limited: Rif the tailgate is open Rif there is snow or heavy rain Rin the dark Rif a very bright light outshines the camera Rif there is fluorescent light, e.g. from flu- orescent lamps or LED lighting Rif there is a rapid change of temperature Rif the camera lens is dirty Guide lines in the display Useful information ! Objects that are not at ground level appear further away than they actually are, for example: Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behind Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch 86 Using the reversing camera

Parking and getting out.

Rthe tail-end of a lorry

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 94 · Applies to: 453

Rslanted posts

Only use the image from the reversing

camera as a guide. You may otherwise

damage your vehicle and/or the object.

Guide lines in different colours show the dis-

tance of obstacles from the rear of the vehi-

cle. Static guide lines do not change when the

steering wheel is turned. Dynamic guide

lines change depending on the position of

the steering wheel.

Static: vehicle width including exterior mirrors ; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m = Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m ? Red, static: approx. 0.3 m A Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including exterior mirrors The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Activating the reversing camera The ignition must be switched on to use the reversing camera. X In the smart Media-System, select Vehi‐ cle> Settings> Rear camera> Rear cam‐ era view settings > Rear camera view. X Confirm with Done. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in the smart Media-System display. Switching off the reversing camera After driving forwards briefly, the reversing camera will turn itself off. Adjusting the reversing camera set- tings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle

Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera view settings. X To select the desired settings: RSwitch Rear camera view on or off. RSwitch Static guidelines on or off. RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off. X Confirm with Done. Adjusting reversing camera display settings X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle Settings > Rear camera > Image settings. X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satura‐ tion and Contrast. X Confirm the display settings with Done. Locking the vehicle G WARNING If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, they could: Ropen doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic Roperate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example, if they: Rrelease the parking brake Rshift the automatic transmission out of park position P or shift manual trans- mission into neutral Rstart the engine Locking the vehicle 87

Parking and getting out. Z

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 95 · Applies to: 453

When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children and animals unattended in the vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reach of children. X Press the & button on the key. The turn signals flash twice. Priming and deactivating the anti- theft alarm system Useful information The immobiliser prevents the vehicle from being started without the correct key. It is switched on and off automatically. The anti-theft alarm system triggers a visual and audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or the service cover is opened. The alarm is not switched off, even if, for example, you close the open door that has triggered it. Priming X Close the doors. X Close the tailgate. X Close the service cover. X Press the & button on the key. The alarm system is primed after approx- imately 30 seconds. Deactivating and switching off the alarm X Press the % button on the key. 88 Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system

Parking and getting out.

Overview of the on-board computer

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 96 · Applies to: 453

Please note

G WARNING

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communications equipment in

the vehicle while driving will distract you

from traffic conditions. You could then lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only operate these devices if road traffic

conditions permit. If you are unsure about

the surrounding conditions, pull over to a

safe location and make entries only while

the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-

functioned, you may not recognise func-

tion restrictions relevant to safety. The

operating safety of your vehicle may be

impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle

checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle is

impaired, you must park the vehicle safely as

soon as possible. Consult a qualified spe-

cialist workshop.

Display messages and displays in the

instrument cluster are only shown for cer-

tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers are

responsible for ensuring that the vehicle is

operating safely. A vehicle which is not oper-

ating safely can cause an accident.

The display shows the outside temperature

on the far right in the header. Drivers must

pay special attention to road conditions

when temperatures are around freezing

point. Changes in the outside temperature

are displayed after a short delay.

After opening the door, the on-board com-

puter is activated for approximately

15 minutes. To permanently activate the on-

board computer, the ignition must be

switched on.

Monochrome display overview

Time ; Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion:drive program = Vehicles with automatic transmis- sion:gearshift recommendation ? Transmission display A Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp B Outside temperature display and black ice warning Ò C Trip meter, current fuel consumption, service display D Tyre pressure monitor E Fuel gauge F eco score display, reserve fuel display G Brake lamp failure warning lamp H Total distance recorder I Cruise control, limiter When the vehicle is stationary or up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display shows the current fuel consumption as a numerical value in l/h. Overview of the on-board computer 89

Operating the on-board computer. Z

Colour display overview

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 97 · Applies to: 453

Time

; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp

= Digital speedometer

? Outside temperature display with black

ice warning Ò

A Display field for display messages,

menus and lists

B Reserve fuel display

C Fuel gauge

D Transmission display

E Cruise control, limiter

Calling up displays

Calling up displays (monochrome dis-

play)

Monochrome display

; Buttons on the multifunction lever

X Briefly press the ´ button on the mul-

tifunction lever to scroll forward at menu

level.

X Press and hold the ´ button on the mul-

tifunction level to directly call up the trip

meter.

X Press and hold a on the multifunction

lever to reset the values.

The following displays can be called up one

after another:

RTrip meter

RCurrent fuel consumption

RService due date

RSetting the time

RRestarts the tyre pressure monitor

Calling up displays (colour display)

Calling up displays

Colour display ; Left control panel X Briefly press 9 or : on left control panel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards. X Press and hold 9 or : on left control panel ;, to directly call up the Distance display. The following displays can be called up one after another: RDistance RTrip computer from start 90 Calling up displays

Operating the on-board computer.

RTrip computer from reset

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 98 · Applies to: 453

Reco score from start

RFuel consumption

RCoolant temperature

RMessages and service

RSettings

RDigital speedometer

Distance display

Trip meter

; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display

Elapsed time

; Distance

= Average speed

? Average fuel consumption

The data in the from start menu refers to the

start of the journey, whilst the data in the

from reset menu refers to the last time the

submenu was reset.

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the from start values in

the instrument cluster are reset. The eco

score display is also reset automatically.

eco score display

The eco score display provides feedback on

how economical the driver's driving behav-

iour is (Y page 62).

If the ignition remains switched off for lon-

ger than four hours, the eco score display will

be automatically reset.

When the eco score display is reset, the from

start trip computer is also reset.

Fuel consumption display

The display shows the fuel consumption over

the previous 15 minutes.

When the vehicle is stationary or up to a

speed of approximately 5 km/h, the display

shows the current fuel consumption as a

numeric value in l/h. If the unit of measure-

ment for distance is set to miles, the display

shows two dashes.

Coolant temperature display

The display shows the current coolant tem-

perature. If this rises above 110 †, then the

display shows a display message.

Messages and service display

Message memory ; Next service due date The display shows the number of display messages in the message memory and the next service due date. ¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi- cates a major service. Calling up displays 91

Operating the on-board computer. Z

To show the display messages, the ignition

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 99 · Applies to: 453

must be switched on. X Press a to scroll through the display messages. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop. Digital speedometer display The display shows the digital speedometer. The digital speedometer in the header is hid- den. England only: the digital speedometer in the header continues to be displayed. Setting values Setting values (monochrome display) Setting the time X Press ´ repeatedly until ° is shown next to the time. X Press a until the hour display flashes. X Set values. Resetting values X Scroll to the desired display. X Press a for 3 seconds. Setting values (colour display) Setting values X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings. X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired menu. X Press 9 or : to set the desired data. X Press a to confirm. Resetting values X Press a. X Select yes and press a to confirm. Setting the time X Select Settings > Time > Set the time. X Set values. Vehicles with smart Media-System: the time and time format are set in the smart Media-System. Setting the time format X Select Settings > Time > Time format. X Set the value Adjusting the instrument cluster light- ing X Select Settings > Display > Display brightness. X Set the value Switching on the ambient lighting X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On. Setting the brightness of the ambient lighting X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > Brightness. X Set the value Displaying the digital speedometer in the header X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer. X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo. function. The digital speedometer is displayed in the header. England only: the digital speedometer in the header cannot be hidden. 92 Setting values

Operating the on-board computer.

Setting the unit for speed in the digital

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 100 · Applies to: 453

speedometer X Select Settings > Display> Digital speedometer > Unit. X Set the value The following values are set: RDigital speedometer display RDigital speedometer in the header England only: only the display unit of the digital speedometer is set. Setting the unit of measurement for dis- tance X Select Settings > Display > Units of distance. X Set the value Setting the temperature unit X Select Settings > Display > Units of temperature. X Set the value Starting the tyre pressure monitor X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor. Information on the tyre pressure monitor; see (Y page 139). Setting the language X Select Settings > Language (Language). X Set the value Setting values 93

Operating the on-board computer. Z

Operating and setting the smart Audio-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 101 · Applies to: 453

System

smart Audio-System overview

G WARNING

Operating the integrated information sys-

tems and communications equipment in

the vehicle while driving will distract you

from traffic conditions. You could then lose

control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an

accident.

Only operate these devices if road traffic

conditions permit. If you are unsure about

the surrounding conditions, pull over to a

safe location and make entries only while

the vehicle is stationary.

You must observe the legal requirements for

the country in which you are currently driv-

ing when operating the smart Audio-System.

Number keys 1 - 6 ; C Previous station or track = USB1 port and bracket connection for mobile phone with smart cross connect app ? D Next station or track A % Goes back one menu level higher B Control for menu selection and station list, 9 button C USB2 port D Ã Telephone menu, to accept or reject calls E ª System settings F 8 Mute G Õ Plays back media from external data carriers H $ Switches on the radio and selects the waveband. I External audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) J Volume control, Ü button K F Sets the radio text Operating and setting the smart Audio- System X To switch on or off: press Ü. X To scroll through menus: turn control B. X To select menu options: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To navigate to the next-highest folders: press the % button. X To set values: turn control B and press the 9 button. X To increase or decrease the volume: turn control J. Using external devices Useful information You can connect the following external devi- ces: RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USB port) RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec- tion) RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phones Removing and fastening the cover of the USB1 port 94 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

Using the smart Audio-System.

Removing the cover

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 102 · Applies to: 453

X Turn the cover anti-clockwise using han- dle :. X Press on marking ;. X Remove the cover. Fastening the cover X Place cover in position ;. X Turn the cover clockwise using handle :. Using the smartphone bracket Useful information i Operating smartphones in the smart- phone bracket is permitted exclusively in connection with the smart cross connect App. The smartphone bracket keeps your mobile phone secured in the vehicle. In order to use the smart cross connect App, rotate the mobile phone to landscape mode. You can use the USB port behind the smart- phone bracket on the left to charge your mobile phone during the journey. The smartphone bracket is suitable for mobile phones with the following dimen- sions: RThickness: 6 – 10 mm RWidth: 55 – 82 mm RLength: 120 – 162 mm Further information is available from any smart Centre. Fitting the smartphone bracket X Remove the cover from the USB1 port. X Connect the smartphone bracket to USB1 and turn the locking mechanism clock- wise. Inserting and removing the mobile phone X To insert: press the right-hand raised but- ton on the bottom edge of the smartphone bracket. The upper tensioning arm opens. X If necessary, press the left-hand button on the bottom edge of the smartphone bracket. The tensioning arms on the side open. X Set the mobile phone in the smartphone bracket. X If necessary, press the tensioning arms on the side together to set them to the size of the mobile phone. X Press down the upper tensioning arms to secure the mobile phone. X To remove: press the right-hand raised button on the bottom edge of the smart- phone bracket. The upper tensioning arm opens. X Remove the mobile phone from the smart- phone bracket. Operating the smart Audio-System via the mobile phone You can use the smart cross connect App for iOS and Android to operate the smart Audio- System via a mobile phone. X Download the smart cross connect App from the App Store® (iOS) or Google Play™ (Android) and install it on the mobile phone. X Connect the mobile phone with the smart Audio-System via Bluetooth®. X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket. Further information about operating the smart Audio-System via mobile phone can be found in the smart cross connect App user's guide. Adjusting the system settings Setting the system language X Press the ª button. X Select Language. The list of languages appears. X Select the language. Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 95

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Switching the time on or off

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 103 · Applies to: 453

X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select ON or OFF. Setting the time X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Set Time. X Set the time. Setting the time format X Press the ª button. X Select Clock. X Select Format. X Choose one of the following time formats: RAm/Pm R24hr Adjusting the audio settings Adjusting the sound X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Sound. X Select the desired sound settings: RBass: adjusts the bass. RTreble: adjusts the treble. RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal- ance) to left or right. Switching the bass boost on and off X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Bass Boost. X Select ON or OFF. Resetting audio settings X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Audio Default. X Select Yes. Adjusting the volume to the vehicle speed X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. X Select Speed Vol.. X Select the desired level. The higher the level, the higher the volume will be at increasing road speeds. Listening to the radio Switching on the radio X Press the Ü button. X Press the $ button. The smart Audio-System receives data transmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS). Selecting a waveband X Press the $ button repeatedly until the desired waveband appears. If available, you can switch between the fol- lowing wavebands: RFM1 RFM2 RDR1 (digital radio) RDR2 (digital radio) RAM Selecting stations manually FM and AM waveband X Press the D or C button to set the desired frequency. Digital radio frequency range X To select the desired station, press the D or C button. Holding down the D or C button starts the station search, which stops at the next station with adequate reception. 96 Listening to the radio

Using the smart Audio-System.

Setting a station from the station list

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 104 · Applies to: 453

X Press a in radio mode. The station list appears. X Select a station. X Press a to confirm. Updating the station list X Press the $ button until you hear a tone. Storing a station X Select a waveband. X Set the station. X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear a tone. The station set for this waveband will be saved at the button you have pressed. Selecting a stored station X Select a waveband. X Press a number key for the stored station. Switching traffic announcements on/off X Press the ª button. X Select Radio. X Select TA. X Select ON or OFF. Interrupting a traffic announcement X During a traffic announcement, briefly press %. Displaying radio text in FM radio X Press the F button. If radio text is available, it will be dis- played. Digital radio (if available) Information on DAB i Any electronic devices taken into the vehicle may seriously impair radio and DAB radio reception. Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad- casting) is a digital transmission standard optimally designed for the mobile reception of radio transmissions. Several programmes are combined into so-called ensembles and transmitted on a single frequency. Some sta- tions only transmit programmes at certain times. If you have selected a programme that has subsequently been removed from the ensemble, it will no longer be received. You will continue to receive the other pro- grammes in the ensemble. Select either a dif- ferent programme or a different ensemble. i DAB cannot be received everywhere in Europe. Displaying radio text This function provides additional data transmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). Besides displaying the artist and track names, information on the current pro- gramme may also be available. X Press the F button. X Select Radio text. The î dot shows that radio text is acti- vated. Setting alerts If this function is activated, certain pro- gramme categories allow another broadcast to interrupt the current audio playback. Numerous categories can be selected, such as news, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant informa- tion. This function is only available in cer- tain countries. X Call up the setup menu (Y page 95). X Radio > DR Interrupt > Select the desired category. The î dot shows the active settings. i Several categories can be selected. Repeat the procedure if necessary. Listening to the radio 97

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Displaying the EPG

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 105 · Applies to: 453

EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is available in the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2). If the station supports EPG, you can use the EPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to display the current and the following two radio pro- grammes. At the very least, the programme overview contains the name, time and length of each programme. X Press the F button. X Select EPG. X Select the desired station. Switching on Intellitext™ If the station supports Intellitext™, you can have additional information displayed, such as news, headlines, business news, sports news etc. A prerequisite for the reception is that broadcasters process the relevant infor- mation. Intellitext™ is only available in cer- tain countries. X Press the F button. X Select Intellitext. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Useful information The Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Audio-System. Overview of compatible mobile phones: http://www.smart.com/connect. To make a call, Bluetooth® must be activated on the mobile phone and the smart Audio- System. Once outside the Bluetooth® reception range, the connection is terminated automatically. To clearly identify a mobile phone, change the device name (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc- tions). X Search for devices. Switching on the Bluetooth® function of the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm with 9. X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9. The î dot shows the active setting. Authorising a mobile phone on the smart Audio-System X Press the à button. X Select Scan devices. The system searches for available mobile phones and displays them in a list. X Select the mobile phone and confirm with 9. X Do one of the following: RIf a code appears in the smart Audio- System display and on the mobile phone, confirm it on the mobile phone. RIf the code 0000 appears in the smart Audio-System display, enter it and con- firm it on the mobile phone. A maximum of five mobile phones can be authorised. However, only one authorised mobile phone can be connected with Blue- tooth® at a time. Loading and updating the telephone book X Press the à button. X Select Settings > PB download. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, the phone book and call lists will be transferred after you connect. Removing a mobile phone from the list (de-authorising) X Press the à button. X Select Del. device. Authorised mobile phones are displayed. X Select the mobile phone to be removed. X Select YES. 98 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Audio-System.

After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth® con-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 106 · Applies to: 453

nection to the mobile phone is no longer established automatically. Connecting another authorised mobile phone X Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone X Press the à button. X Select Sel. device. All authorised mobile phones are dis- played. The currently connected mobile phone is indicated by a dot. X Select the desired mobile phone from the list. Setting the sound Adjusting the call volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Call. X Select the setting. Switching the smart Audio-System ring- tone on and off X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Ringtone. X To switch on: select Car. X To switch off: select Phone. Adjusting the ringtone volume X Press the à button. X Select Settings > Volume > Ring. X Select the setting. Telephone operation Calling a contact from the phone book To call a contact in the telephone book, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be imported into the smart Audio-System. X Press the à button. X Select Telephone book. X Select the contact. The details for the contact are displayed. X Select the desired telephone number. X Press the 9 button. Dialling a number X Press the à button. X Select Dial Number. An input screen appears. X Enter the number. X Press the 9 button. X Select ;. Using call lists to call contacts To call a contact in a call list, the mobile phone telephone book first has to be impor- ted into the smart Audio-System. X Press the à button. X Select Call lists. X Select Dialled, Received or Missed. X Select an entry from the list. Calling the last number dialled X Press and hold the à button until the call is established. Accepting a call X Press the à button. Rejecting a call X Press and hold the à button until the call is rejected. Holding and continuing a call X To place a call on hold: select Â. X To continue the call: press the 9 button. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select z. X To transfer the call back to the smart Audio-System: press 9. Using a mobile phone 99

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Entering numbers or characters during a

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 107 · Applies to: 453

call X Select #123. X Enter numbers or characters. Ending a call X Press the 9 button. Operating external data storage media Useful information You can switch between the following media sources, depending on the type of external data carrier connected: RUSB 1 or iPod 1 RUSB 2 or iPod 2 RAUX (external audio equipment) RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected device, such as a mobile phone) Selecting external data carriers X Press the Õ button repeatedly until the desired media source appears in the dis- play. Operating a USB device or iPod® Connecting a device X Connect the device to the USB port. The device is activated automatically and the first track is played. Selecting a track X In USB mode, press the 9 button. Available tracks or folders are displayed. X Turn control B. X Press 9 to confirm. Rapid search X Press the 9 button. An entry field appears. X To enter characters, turn control B and press the 9 button. Skipping to the next or previous track X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Switching random track sequence on/off X Press the C button. Switching the repeat function on/off X Press the number key. Selecting a track from a category with an iPod® connected X Press the 9 button. X Select the category from a list. Different categories, such as playlists, artists or albums, can be selected, depend- ing on the connected device. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external audio equipment (AUX) Connecting a device X Connect the device to the AUX jack. Use the Õ button to access the media on a connected AUX device. Adjusting the volume of external audio equipment X Press the ª button. X Select Audio. 100 Operating external data storage media

Using the smart Audio-System.

X Select AUX In.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 108 · Applies to: 453

X Select one of the following options for the volume: RLow RMedium RHigh Bluetooth® device operation Connecting a device X Connect a Bluetooth® audio device the same way you connect a mobile phone with Bluetooth®. Skipping to the next or previous track X Press the D or C button briefly to skip to the next track or press longer for rapid scrolling. Displaying metadata X Press the F button repeatedly until the desired metadata is displayed. Operating external data storage media 101

Using the smart Audio-System. Z

Operating and setting up the smart

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 109 · Applies to: 453

Media-System

Operating the smart Media-System

Please note

Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

:

Switches voice control system on

and off, accepts and ends a phone call

; W Increases the volume

= X Reduces the volume

? smart Media-System display

Voice control system

The voice control system can be used to carry

out the following smart Media-System func-

tions:

REnter a destination for navigation.

RMake a call.

RStart an application.

Controls on the smart Media-System

Previous station or track and fast rewind

; Mute

= Next station or track and fast forward

? Switches to the home screen

A On/off button and volume control Ü

B Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console

Port for external audio equipment (AUX) ; USB port = SD card slot 102 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System.

Overview of home screen

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 110 · Applies to: 453

Radio station, media track ; Status of the mobile phone and field strength of the mobile phone network = Outside temperature ? Time A Traffic reports for the planned route B Map C Next navigation manoeuvre D Context menu E Favourites menu F Main menu G eco score Switching the smart Media-System on and off To switch on automatically X Start the engine. To switch off automatically X Switch off the ignition and open the door. To switch on and off manually X Press the Ü button. Scrolling through a menu or list on the touchscreen X Touch the touchscreen with your finger. X Swipe up, down, left or right. The selection on the display will then move in the respective direction. Selecting items on the touchscreen X Tap on a menu, an option or an application with one finger. The menu, the option or the application is launched. Controlling media playback on the touchscreen X Swipe to the left. The next media item is played or dis- played, e.g. the next track or station. X Swipe to the right. Playback is restarted or the previous media item is played or displayed, e.g. the previous track. Media playback can be controlled in the fol- lowing playback modes: RRadio mode RMusic and audio playback RImage playback RVideo playback Calling up menus X Select Menu on the home screen. Select one of the following submenus: RMultimedia Radio and media functions RNavigation Navigation system RTelephone Mobile phone functions RVehicle Reversing camera, eco score and addi- tional functions RServices Apps and TomTom services RSystem General systems settings Confirming settings X Select Done. Settings are accepted. Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 103

Using the smart Media-System.

Switching off the display

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 111 · Applies to: 453

X Select home page > W > Switch off display. Adjusting the system settings Adjusting the display To set the daytime brightness X Select System > Display . X Move the Daytime brightness control to the left or right. To set the nighttime brightness X Select System > Display. X Move the Nighttime brightness control to the left or right. To activate automatic switching between daytime and nighttime brightness X Select System > Display > Automatic day/ night mode. Displaying night mode constantly X Select Force night mode. Setting the system language X Select System > Language. A list of available languages is displayed. X Select the desired language. i The language of the spoken navigation commands can be selected independently of the system language. Changing the on-screen keyboard X Select System > Keyboards. X Select one of the following keyboard lay- outs: RLatin RGreek RCyrillic For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possible to choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTY and QWERTZ layouts. Selecting the home screen display X Select System > Home page. A selection of home screen displays appears. X Select the desired display. Resetting to factory settings X Select System > Factory settings. X Confirm with Yes. All settings changed in the system will then return to the default values and all destinations, routes and favourites will be deleted. Setting the time manually X Select System > Clock > Set time. X Change the minutes and hours of the time shown. Activating automatic time adjustment X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐ matic time adjustment. Setting the time format X Select System > Clock > Time format. X Choose one of the following time formats: R18:00 R6:00 PM R6:00 Displaying status and information X Select System > Status & Information. X Select one of the following information options: RVersion information Software and hardware of the Media- System RGPS status Current GPS signal strength RNetwork status Signal strength of the data connection RLicences For free and open-source software used RCopyright 104 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System

Using the smart Media-System.

For text in the TomTom software used.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 112 · Applies to: 453

Adjusting the audio settings

Setting the volume

X Select System > Sound > Volumes.

X Select one of the following volume set-

tings:

RMain volume

For the whole system

RHands-free

For the hands-free system

RRingtone

RNavigation

Volume for the whole navigation system

RComputer voice

Volume of the computer-generated voice

RApp events

Volume of events triggered by apps

X Set the desired volume.

Adjusting the volume to the vehicle

speed

X Select System > Sound > Speed dependency.

X Move the Speed dependency control to the

left or right.

The higher the value, the more the volume

increases with the speed of the vehicle.

Adjusting surround sound (balance)

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Balance.

X Select Manual.

X Move the control to the desired position.

X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting the bass and treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Manual.

X Use the control to adjust the bass and tre-

ble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass and

treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >

Bass/Treble > Neutral.

Audio is played without increasing the

bass or treble.

Activating and deactivating arkamys®

bass boost (vehicles without JBL sound

system)

The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasises

the bass during playback.

X Select Multimedia > Settings > arkamys

bass boost.

Setting the volume for warning tones

X Select System > Sound > Warnings.

X Move the control to the left or right.

Enabling warning tones when the display

is switched off

X Select System > Sound > Warnings > Sound

warning tones when display turned

off.

Creating and deleting favourites

Creating favourites

Preset ; Navigation = Radio ? Telephone A Services B Context menu Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 105

Using the smart Media-System.

Frequently used settings such as phone con-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 113 · Applies to: 453

tacts and radio stations can be stored as

favourites. Six favourites can be stored for

each of the following categories:

RNavigation

RRadio

RTelephone

RServices

X Select Favourites on the home screen.

X Select category.

X Select the next empty memory position.

A list of possible favourites appears.

X Select Favourites.

Deleting favourites

X Select Favourites on the home screen.

X Press W.

X Select Remove a favourite.

X Perform one of the following steps:

RSelect the favourite to be removed and

press Delete to confirm.

RTo delete all favourites, select Remove

all favourites.

Listening to the radio

Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes

Useful information

In radio mode there are three different dis-

play modes, in which various settings can be

made:

R“List” display mode (FM and digital radio)

R“Frequency” display mode (AM and FM

radio)

R“Presets” display mode

“List” display mode (FM and digital radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio)

and preset group (FM/DAB)

; Selects previous station

= Selects next station

? Context menu

A Selects “Frequency” display mode

B “List” display mode

C Selects “presets” display mode

D Station currently playing

“Frequency” display mode (AM and FM

radio)

Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) and preset group (FM) ; Increases or decreases the frequency in small increments = Station search, forwards or backwards ? Context menu A Adjusts the frequency manually B Station currently playing 106 Listening to the radio

Using the smart Media-System.

“Presets” display mode

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 114 · Applies to: 453

Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio) and preset group (FM/DAB) ; Stored station = Context menu ? Station currently playing Selecting a station “List” display mode X Swipe up or down in the station list X Tap on the desired station. “Frequency” display mode (AM and FM radio) X Slide control on the waveband left or right Starting a station search X Select C or D in the “frequency” dis- play mode Storing a station X Set the station. X Select W > Save as preset. Up to six stations can be stored for each waveband. Displaying radio text Radio text contains information such as cur- rent track or latest news. X Select W > Display radio text. Displaying digital radio services X Select W > Digital radio services. X Select one of the following digital radio services: REPG (Electronic Programme Guide) Programme schedule for the station cur- rently playing RIntellitext Programme information and programme schedule for the station currently play- ing RSlide show Displays images to accompany the cur- rent broadcast Other radio settings Searching for alternative frequencies with the best possible reception quality X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF (Alternative frequency). Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Traffic (Traffic program). Displaying the programme type (e.g. classical) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > PTY (Program type). Switching to the corresponding FM sta- tion when digital radio reception is poor X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Simulcast. Displaying information on certain cate- gories (i-Announcement, digital radio only) X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i- Announcement. X Select category of i-Announcements. Listening to the radio 107

Using the smart Media-System.

Updating the station list

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 115 · Applies to: 453

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > Update radio list. Using a mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone Please note G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radia- tion could interfere with the vehicle elec- tronics, e.g.: Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to an exterior aerial Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor- rectly or is not a low-reflection type This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit- ted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating RF transmitters in the vehicle, always connect them to the low- reflection exterior aerial. Bluetooth® must be enabled both on the mobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Enabling and disabling Bluetooth® The mobile phone must be compatible with the smart Media-System. For an overview of compatible mobile phones, visit: https://www.smart.com/ connect. X Select Settings > Enable Bluetooth. The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is ena- bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys- tem. Authorising a mobile phone Authorising a mobile phone for the first time Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select the Telephone menu. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see Owner's Manual from the manufacturer). The message Bluetooth is enabled is shown. Authorising another mobile phone Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smart Media-System. X Select Settings > Manage devices. The list of visible mobile phones is dis- played. X Select a mobile phone from the list. X Enter the security code on the mobile phone or accept access confirmation (see Owner's Manual from the manufacturer). The Bluetooth® connection is established. The Bluetooth® connection will be estab- lished automatically in future. Downloading telephone data automati- cally X Select Settings > Download telephone data automatically. X If necessary, accept the access confirma- tion on the mobile phone. During connection, up to 1000 contacts are automatically transferred to the smart Media-System. 108 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System.

Connecting another authorised mobile

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 116 · Applies to: 453

phone X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select a mobile phone. The current Bluetooth® connection is ter- minated. The desired mobile phone is con- nected to the smart Media-System instead. Removing a mobile phone from the list X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Delete device(s). X Select a mobile phone. X Select Delete. Terminating a Bluetooth® connection X Select Settings > Manage devices. X Select W > Disconnect all devices. X Select a mobile phone. If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth® receiver range, the connection is automati- cally terminated. Using MirrorLink™ Useful information MirrorLink® is standard for the connection between the smart Media-System and a mobile phone. With MirrorLink®, the content of the display on your mobile phone can be displayed in the smart Media-System. MirrorLink™ is available for mobile phones with the "Android" operating system. Further information: http://www.smart.com/ connect. To use MirrorLink™, observe the following requirements: Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror- Link™ version 1.1 and above Rthe mobile phone is switched on Ra MirrorLink™ certified App must be installed on the mobile phone Rthe GPS connection must be activated on the mobile phone Rthe time is set on the smart Media-System Setting up a connection X Activate MirrorLink™ on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). X Connect a mobile phone with a connecting cable to the USB socket in the centre con- sole. X Select Yes. Apps which have been certified for Mir- rorLink™ will be shown in the smart Media-System display. Calling up MirrorLink™ Apps X Select Services > MirrorLink™. X Select the desired app. The display switches to full screen mode. X To leave full screen display: press and hold the ò button on the smart Media-Sys- tem until the lower bar is shown. X To exit the display: select 2. MirrorLink™ audio playback If your mobile phone supports this function, you can control audio playback via the but- tons on the smart Media-System. X To select the previous track: press the 9 button. X Rewind: press and hold the 9 button. X To select the next track: press the : button. X Fast forward: press and hold the : but- ton. X To mute:press the x button. Disconnecting the MirrorLink™ connec- tion X Select q > Disconnect. Using a mobile phone 109

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Telephone operation

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 117 · Applies to: 453

Useful information The following conditions must be fulfilled in order to make a 999 or 112 emergency call: Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser- ted in the mobile phone Ra mobile phone network is available Calling a contact from the phone book X Select Telephone book. X Select the contact. X Select the contact's telephone number. If the phone book contains multiple contacts, they can be called up using a Search. Dialling a number X Select Dial number. X Enter a number on the keypad. X Select Call. Calling a contact from the call log X Select Call logs. X Select an entry from the list. The call log can be sorted according to calls made, calls received and missed calls using the corresponding receiver icon. Accepting and rejecting an incoming call If a call is incoming, the following informa- tion will appear on the display: Rname of caller, if already in the phone book Rnumber of caller, if name of caller not already in the phone book RPrivate number, if the caller has Hide caller ID switched on X To accept the call, select Accept. X To reject the call, select Reject. The call will be forwarded to voicemail. Holding and continuing a call X Select W > Put on hold. X To continue the call, select Continue. Transferring a call to the mobile phone X Select W > Mobile phone. Ending a call X Select End call. Further settings Setting the volume X Select Settings > Volumes. X Set the volume of the hands-free system and the ringtone. Activating voicemail X Select Voicemail. X Enter the voicemail number on the keypad. X Select Done. Voicemail is activated and the voicemail number is dialled. Configuring voicemail X Select Settings > Voicemail configura‐ tion. Updating the phone book A Bluetooth® connection must be present. X Select Phone book > W > Update tele‐ phone data. Updating the call log X Select Call logs > W > Update tele‐ phone data. Adding a contact to favourites X Select Telephone > Phone book. X Select a contact from the list. X Select W > Add to favourites. X Dial a phone number. 110 Using a mobile phone

Using the smart Media-System.

Connecting and operating external

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 118 · Applies to: 453

data storage media

Useful information

The following external data storage media

can be connected:

RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max.

64 GB) or iPod™

RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB)

RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)

RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phones

The following formats are supported:

RMP3 files

RWMA files

RACC formats

(.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R, .MP4

and .3GP)

ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA)

RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM)

A data storage medium may contain no more

than eight directory levels.

The smart Media-System only recognises the

first partition of a data storage medium. The

partition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32.

Connecting external data storage

media

Connecting a USB memory stick

X Insert a USB memory stick in the port on

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in

the centre console.

Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth® device,

such as a Bluetooth®-capable mobile

phone.

Operating external data storage media

Selecting connected external data stor-

age media

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media.

X Select connected medium.

Controlling playback from a USB memory

stick or SD card

Selects the previous track

; Selects the next track

= Stops and continues playback

? Switches track repeat on

A Switches random playback on

B Calls up the context menu

C Displays the playlist

D Selects a new track based on categories,

e.g. album, genre, folder

E Resumes playback at any point in the

track

Controlling playback from a Bluetooth®

device

Selects a new track ; Selects the previous track Connecting and operating external data storage media 111

Using the smart Media-System. Z

= Stops playback

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 119 · Applies to: 453

? Selects the next track A Displays the playlist B Calls up the context menu Selecting a different device X Select W > Change source. Connecting another authorised Blue- tooth® device X Select W > Find new device. Enabling and disabling random playback X To enable: select W > Enable random playback. X To disable: select W > Disable random playback. Displaying details of tracks on a USB memory stick or SD card X Select W > Track details. Selecting a track from current playlist X Select New selection > Folders. The current playlist is displayed. X Select Find. A keyboard is shown. X Enter the name or part of the name of the track you are looking for. Selecting a track from categories X Select New selection. X Select category for playback. Switching album cover display on and off The album cover must be saved in the audio file. X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media > Display album cover. Viewing images Useful information Images that have been saved to an SD card or USB memory stick can be viewed in the smart Media-System. The following file formats can be displayed: R.JPG R.GIF R.PNG R.BMP Image playback Starting image playback X Insert SD card or USB memory stick into the corresponding port. X Select Multimedia > Images. X Select media source USB or SD. X Select folder. X Select image. Switching between images X Swipe left or right. Specifying a new selection of images X Select New selection. Setting image playback Switching from normal to thumbnail view X Select Thumbnails. Switching from thumbnail to normal view X Select an image. Displaying in full screen mode X Select W > Full screen. 112 Viewing images

Using the smart Media-System.

Activating the controls in full screen

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 120 · Applies to: 453

mode X Tap the touchscreen. Switching from full screen mode to nor- mal view X Select W > Normal view. Enlarging the image X Select W > Enlarge. Showing images as a slide show X Select W > Slide show. Setting the display duration X Select W > Image settings > Slide show delay. X Set the desired time using the controls. Setting default view for image playback X Select W > Image settings > Default view. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Video playback Video playback Starting video playback X Insert SD card or connect USB stick. X Select Multimedia > Video. X Select USB or SD. X Select folder or video. All videos in a folder are played one after the other. i The size of the video file may have an impact on the performance of the system. Therefore, only play back videos with a length of up to 5 minutes. Selecting the next or previous video X Select D or C. Stopping and continuing playback X Select Ë. Playing a new video X Select New selection. X Select a new video Setting the video display Playing videos in full screen mode X Select Full screen. Setting the default view for video play- back X Select W > video settings. X Select Normal view or Full screen. Using the navigation system Starting the navigation system Please note G WARNING Operating the integrated information sys- tems and communications equipment in the vehicle while driving will distract you from traffic conditions. You could then lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate these devices if road traffic conditions permit. If you are unsure about the surrounding conditions, pull over to a safe location and make entries only while the vehicle is stationary. The navigation system does not provide information on stop signs, right of way signs, traffic regulations or road safety regula- tions. Using the navigation system 113

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Traffic regulations always take priority over

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 121 · Applies to: 453

the navigation system's driving recommen- dations. Observe the legal stipulations and traffic regulations of the country you are driving in when in navigation mode. Starting the navigation system X Select Menu > Navigation. The following functions can be carried out: Rsearching for a destination Rplanning a route Rdisplaying a map Rcalling up TomTom services Rchanging navigation settings Reading map data G WARNING SD cards are small parts. They can be swal- lowed and cause choking. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil- dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med- ical attention immediately. ! To prevent damage to data, only use the SD card provided for the data in the Media- System or for updating map and systems files. X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot in the centre console. X Switch on the device. The map data is read by the navigation system. Removing an SD card X Select Menu > System > Remove SD card. X Confirm the display message with Yes. X Press the SD card. X Remove the SD card from the slot. Updating map data Regular updates will be offered for the map data. The first update can be downloaded for free in the web portal within 90 days of vehi- cle activation. This requires registration at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further infor- mation is available from any smart Centre. X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insert into a computer. X Install update software on the computer. X Run map update assistant. i As well as updates, the latest software for the Media-System can be downloaded and Premium Voices by TomTom can be pur- chased. Entering and managing destinations Entering a destination by address X When using the navigation system for the first time, enter country. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Address. X If desired, change the country using the flag symbol. X Enter town or postcode. X Select the destination from the list. X Select the street. X Select the house number. X Confirm with Done. Searching for a car park near the desti- nation address This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Select W > Nearby car park. A list of car parks near the current desti- nation appears. Displaying information about the desti- nation address This function can be called up when entering the destination. X Select W > Show information Entering a destination using the map A location on the map can be selected as the destination. 114 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 122 · Applies to: 453

on map. X Align map view with the destination. X Tap the destination point on the display. The symbol selected is highlighted in blue. X Tap on the symbol to confirm. Entering a destination using the voice control system The voice control system must be switched on. X Say the command "Enter address". X When prompted by the voice control sys- tem, say the destination address, includ- ing street name, house number and city. X Say the voice command “Yes” or, if several possible destinations are displayed, say the number. Selecting a destination from the list of last destinations X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent destinations. X Select destination. Entering a destination using geo-coor- dinates X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐ tude Longitude. X Enter the longitude and latitude Setting home location X Select Navigation > Settings > Set home address. X Enter a home address Setting home as a destination X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home. Selecting a saved location as destination At least one destination must be stored for this function. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved locations. X Select destination. Managing saved locations X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage saved locations. Entering a point of interest POIs such as museums, restaurants or car parks near a location are displayed on the map. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point of interest. The following list of surrounding areas appears. A POI can be searched for in these areas: RNear my location RAlong the route RNear destination RNear home RIn a city X Select surrounding area for the search for a POI. The following list of categories for POIs appears: Ra list of categories for POIs: e.g. a filling station or restaurant Ra POI name search Ra POI search within a category X Select category for the search. X Select POI. Managing POIs Adding a POI category X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI category. X Enter the name and symbol for the new POI category. Deleting a POI category X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI category. X Select the POI category to be deleted. Using the navigation system 115

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Adding POIs

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 123 · Applies to: 453

X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI. If no POI categories have been defined yet, a prompt appears to enter a POI category. X Select the category for the POI. X Enter your POI. Deleting POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI. X Select POI category. X Select the POI to be deleted. Editing POIs X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Edit POI. X Select POI category. X Customise the POI properties. Setting alerts for a nearby POI X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI. X Select POI category. X Set the distance at which the message should appear. X Set the type of alert issued. Entering a destination via “TomTom Pla- ces” POIs from the “TomTom Places” database are available using the “TomTom Places” func- tion. X Select Navigation > Drive to... > TomTom Places. A list of search criteria appears which can be used to search for a POI. X Select the search criteria. X Enter a search term. Changing the route Useful information Once the destination has been selected, the navigation system calculates the route to the destination. The following options are avail- able for adjusting the route guidance: Rcalculate alternative routes Radjust routes calculated by the navigation system Rplan routes in advance and travel via spe- cific way points Radjust settings for calculating routes Once the route is calculated, a route sum- mary is shown. By default, the quickest route will be calculated for route planning, taking into account IQ Routes™. Traffic information is taken into account when calculating the route. The “route overview” function allows you to set whether the summary of a calculated route is automatically faded out from the display after 10 seconds. If the route is not confirmed with Done, route guidance will start automatically after approximately ten seconds. Displaying a planned route Calculating the route X Enter a destination. X Select Done. Displaying the route details X Select W > Route details. X Select one of the following functions: RDisplay instructions An overview of the route with directions appears. RDisplay a map of the route The route appears on a map. RStart demonstration A simulation of the route guidance for the planned route is started. To end the simulation, tap on the touchscreen and confirm you want to cancel by tapping on Yes. RDisplay the destination The destination for the route appears. 116 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

By pressing W, it is possible to search

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 124 · Applies to: 453

for a car park near the destination or add the location to the saved locations. RShow traffic on route Traffic disruptions along the route are shown. RSummary A summary of the route details appears. Saving a planned route X Select W > Save Itinerary . Changing the route Cancelling the route X Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐ cel route. Route guidance can be resumed again when a new destination is entered. Calculating an alternative route X Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐ culate alternative. A new route is calculated and displayed that takes you on different roads. X Select the alternative route or a previous one. Route guidance via way point The route can be adjusted by entering up to four way points. X Select Navigation > Change route > Travel via. If a way point has already been entered, a list of the saved way points will be dis- played. X Select Add. X Select a new way point from Address, Recent destinations, Saved locations, TomTom Places or POI. The new way point is added. Avoiding road blocks The route can be changed if a section of road along the route is blocked or there is a traffic jam. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid roadblock. X Select the length of the route that needs to be avoided. Avoiding specific roads The route is calculated to avoid specific roads. X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid part of route. A list of the roads on the route is displayed. X Select the road you wish to avoid. Taking traffic disruptions into account The route is recalculated based on current traffic information Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. X Select Navigation > Change route > Mini‐ mise delays. An overview of the traffic disruptions along the route will be shown. X Select the traffic disruption you wish to avoid. Planning a route in advance Adding a route X Select Navigation > Routes. X Select Add. X Select the starting point of the route. X Enter the route destination. X Enter at least one way point for the route. X Enter the route name. X Confirm with Done. Starting navigation using a saved route X Select Navigation > Routes. X Select the desired route. X Select W > Go. Setting route planning Selecting the route type X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Route types. X Select one of the following settings: Using the navigation system 117

Using the smart Media-System. Z

RAsk for every route

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 125 · Applies to: 453

RAlways plan the fastest route

RAlways plan eco routes

RAlways avoid motorways

RAlways plan the shortest route

Selecting the setting for toll roads

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Toll roads.

X Select one of the following settings:

RAsk for toll roads on route

RAlways avoid toll roads

RDo not avoid toll roads

Selecting the setting for ferry connections

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Ferry connections.

X Select one of the following settings:

RAsk for ferries on my route

RAlways avoid ferries

RDo not avoid ferries

Selecting the setting for unpaved roads

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Unpaved roads.

X Select one of the following settings:

RAsk for unpaved roads on my route

RAlways avoid unpaved roads

Selecting the setting for carpool lanes

Carpool lanes are lanes which can only be

used by vehicles with at least two occupants.

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route

planning > Carpool lane settings.

X Select one of the following settings:

RAsk for carpool lanes on my route

RAlways avoid carpool lanes.

RNever avoid carpool lanes

Using information during route guid-

ance

Useful information

Navigation announcements provide guid-

ance during the journey without distracting

you from traffic conditions. In addition, the

display shows information about the route.

Switching navigation announcements on

and off

X Select Navigation > Settings > Turn on

voice guidance or Turn off voice guid‐

ance.

Information such as traffic reports and

warnings will be played even if the naviga-

tion announcements have been deactivated.

During route guidance, traffic information

can be shown for the route ahead. The fol-

lowing traffic information can be received:

RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC)

RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live Service, subject

to a fee)

Live services are not available in all coun-

tries and regions. For more information,

visit: http://tomtom.com/services.

Tracking navigation on the display

Zoom in and out of the map view ; Maximum permitted speed = Name of the next main road or informa- tion about the next street sign ? Traffic information A Route information B Compass and symbol for two or three- dimensional map display C Context menu D Next navigation manoeuvre with dis- tance and symbol for volume adjustment E Information about current radio or audio equipment X Tap on the desired symbol in the map view. The navigation system zooms in on the map view as the vehicle approaches a junction. This makes it possible to follow turning manoeuvres more accurately. 118 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Shortly before navigating a motorway junc-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 126 · Applies to: 453

tion or exit, the display will show a three-

dimensional representation of the lanes and

the exit. Lane Keeping Assist is not available

for all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

Overall delay on route ; Traffic disruption (packed snow) = Traffic disruption (rain) ? Traffic disruption (traffic jam) A Current location and distance to next traffic disruption During route guidance, traffic information is shown for the route ahead. When there are a number of traffic disruptions in quick suc- cession, only the very next disruption on the route will be displayed. Traffic information is not available in all countries and regions. Colour Meaning Grey Unknown or unexplained situa- tion Orange Slow-moving traffic Red Traffic jam Dark red Standstill or road blocked Calling up more detailed information about the traffic problems X Tap on the display for traffic information during route guidance. Scrolling through the traffic reports X Tap on the message on the touchscreen and swipe left or right. Displaying the map for a location Useful information With the “View map” function, the display shows a two-dimensional map. The map shows your current position, as well as a number of other elements, such as Favour- ites. Displaying a map X Select Navigation > View map. A map of the surrounding area will be shown. X To search, select W > Search. Controlling the map view Moving the map X Tap on the centre of the touchscreen. X Swipe in the desired direction. The map will then move in the respective direction. Zooming in on the map X Place two fingers slightly apart in the middle of the touchscreen. X Move your fingers away from each other. Reducing the scale of the map X Place two fingers, at a greater distance apart, on the screen. X Pull your fingers towards each other. Showing and hiding additional informa- tion on the map X Select Navigation > View map. X Select W > Change map information. X Select one of the following information options: RTraffic information RNames RPoints of interest (POIs) RSatellite images RCoordinates Using the navigation system 119

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Using TomTom Services with the navi-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 127 · Applies to: 453

gation system Useful information The TomTom Services menu can be used to call up and manage traffic information and other TomTom Live Services. TomTom Live Services are available for a subscription fee. The following TomTom Services come pre-installed and, following activation, can be used free of charge for a period of three years: RHD Traffic RRadar cameras (not available in all coun- tries) RWeather RTomTom Places More information on services http:// www.tomtom.com/services. More information on availability in specific countries: http://smart.com/connect TomTom Services can also be called up and managed in the Services menu. In the main menu, select Services > TomTom Services. i If you have subscribed to the "TomTom Traffic" service, the "Traffic info" menu will be called "TomTom Traffic". Activating TomTom Services TomTom Services must be activated before using them for the first time. If TomTom Services are not yet activated, a correspond- ing button will be displayed in the main menu and in the Services menu. X Select Services > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services installed on the device are displayed. X Select the desired TomTom Service. Update installed is shown. TomTom Services are activated. Starting TomTom Services X Select Navigation > TomTom Services. The TomTom Services menu is displayed. Checking subscription status for Tom- Tom Services X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > My Services. The services available on the device and their subscription status will be shown. Displaying traffic information along the route X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Display traffic info. on route. X To switch between traffic information items, tap on the message on the touchscreen and swipe left or right. Adjusting the route according to traffic disruptions X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Minimise delays. Viewing traffic disruptions on the map X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > View map. Traffic disruptions are displayed on the map as symbols. X To view detailed information, tap on a traf- fic disruption symbol. The following symbols are used: Sym- bol Meaning Traffic jam Road blocked Traffic disruption Construction site One or more lanes blocked Accident Traffic disruption avoided using the traffic information Fog 120 Using the navigation system

Using the smart Media-System.

Sym-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 128 · Applies to: 453

bol Meaning Wind Snow Black ice Rain Viewing traffic information for the route to work X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. for route to work. X Select one of the following settings: RHome to work RWork to home RChange the home to work route Changing the settings for traffic infor- mation X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Traffic info. settings. X Select one of the following settings: RAlways change to this route The navigation system automatically changes the route if a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report along the route. RRequest confirmation for route If a faster route has been calculated due to a traffic report, the navigation system will ask which route should be used. RNever change my route The navigation system will not change the route, even if a traffic announcement has been made. Reading aloud traffic information X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > Traffic > Read traffic info. aloud. Setting the navigation system Setting the voice The voice which is used for navigation com- mands can be changed. It is possible to choose between computer-generated voices or voices recorded by professionals. For voi- ces that have been recorded by professio- nals, only basic navigation commands will be spoken. X Select System > Sound > Voice. X Select voice for playback. X To listen to the voice, select Test. Setting the voice output X Select System > Sound > Voice output set- tings. X Select one of the following settings: RRead early warning instructions aloud RRead motorway lane instructions aloud RRead traffic info. aloud when nav‐ igating RRead foreign street names aloud RRead street numbers aloud RRead street names aloud RRead weather information aloud RRead POI warnings aloud RRead aloud warnings RRead signposts aloud Changing the map X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map. X Select the desired map. Changing the map colours X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map colours. X Press , or . to select the desired display. Using the navigation system 121

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Setting safety warnings

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 129 · Applies to: 453

X Select System > Safety warnings. X To select the desired settings: RSuggest driving breaks RWarn when driving near schools RWarn when driving faster than allowed RWarn when driving faster than a set speed X Select Resume. X Select a warning tone for the respective safety warning. For the “Warn when driving faster than a set speed” function, the speed above which the warning tone should sound must be entered. Setting the units of measurement for dis- tance All units of measurement for distance in the navigation system can be changed. The units of measurement for distance of other dis- plays are not changed, such as distance dis- plays for the eco score or the on-board com- puter. X Select System > Set units > Distance units. X Select one of the following settings: RKilometres RMiles Setting the units for GPS coordinates X Select System > Set units > GPS co-ordi‐ nate display. X Select one of the following settings: RDegrees (d°) RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m') RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m\' s \'') Managing apps Useful information If available, apps may be installed and man- aged on the smart Media-System. Apps and the use of TomTom services can be called up and managed in the Services menu. The smart Media-System uses a mobile phone connection for data connection. Please take note of the following information when using data services: RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIM card for this vehicle can only be used for data services offered by certain third par- ties, as well as Daimler AG, via the Smart Media-System for use in the vehicle. The use of data services requires the conclu- sion of separate agreements between the vehicle user and the respective provider. Voice service usage is not permitted. As such, the SIM card must be permanently installed as factory equipment. RThe mobile communications connectivity and the SIM card may only be used respon- sibly in accordance with the applicable laws and other legal requirements of the corresponding countries, insofar as this is within the power of the vehicle user. RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem- bly and disassembly of the SIM card are not permitted. Statutory authority remains unaffected. Failure to follow the above instructions, depending on the severity of non-compli- ance, can in some cases lead to temporary or permanent deactivation of the mobile con- nection and the SIM card, in particular to protect Daimler AG and its contractual part- ners from negative legal consequences aris- ing from non-compliance. The availability of mobile connectivity in individual countries depends on the existence of corresponding mobile service agreements with local mobile network providers; availability can there- fore change from time to time. The maximum period of validity for the mobile connectivity is 15 years from the time of installation in the vehicle. Installing Apps If available, apps may be used on the Smart Media-System. This requires registration at http://tomtom.com/forsmart. X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insert into a computer. Further information: http://tomtom.com/ forsmart. 122 Managing apps

Using the smart Media-System.

Displaying and calling up apps

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 130 · Applies to: 453

Displaying apps X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐ tions manager. The Apps installed on the SD card are shown in the smart Media-System. Calling up apps X Select Services. X Select the desired app. Calling up the connectivity manager The connectivity manager allows you to manage the devices connected to the Smart Media-System. X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐ ity manager. Managing data sharing Enabling or disabling data sharing If data sharing has not been enabled before- hand, a corresponding message is shown when the smart Media-System is started up. Data sharing can be enabled or disabled at any time. X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ ing. X Select one of the following settings: RYes Enable data sharing RNo Disable data sharing. Displaying additional information X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing

About. Displaying text in another language X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing Language. Managing apps 123

Using the smart Media-System. Z

Stowing small objects

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 131 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or stowage nets. RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. G WARNING The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con- tainer in place during a journey. If you use a cup holder during a journey, the drinks container could be flung around and liquid could be spilt. Vehicle occupants could come into contact with the liquid and, in particular, be scalded by hot liquid. You could be distracted from the traffic situa- tion and lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. Only place containers of a suit- able size in the cup holder. Seal the con- tainer, in particular when it contains hot liquid. ! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. Using the compartments X To stow objects, use the following com- partments: RStowage compartments in the doors RGlove compartment RSpectacles compartment above the driv- er's seat RStowage net in the front-passenger footwell RDrawer in the centre console RVelcro strip on the front passenger seat for stowing a handbag RCup holders in the front centre console RCup holder in the rear centre console with a recess for storing a mobile phone Rsmart fortwo coupé: stowage compart- ment in the lower tailgate Locking/unlocking the glove compart- ment X Insert the key into the lock and turn clock- wise to position 2 (to lock) or anticlock- wise to position 1 (to unlock). Opening the stowage compartment in the tailgate (smart fortwo coupé) ! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi- mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwise become damaged. 124 Stowing small objects

Loading and stowing.

X Open the tailgate.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 132 · Applies to: 453

X Pull handle : on the inside of the lower tailgate upwards. X Lift up the cover in the direction of the arrow. Stowing luggage and large objects Please note G WARNING If you stow objects in the vehicle interior in an unsuitable way, they could slip or be thrown around and thus hit vehicle occu- pants. Additionally, the cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot restrain the objects placed in them in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury, especially in the event of braking or sudden changes in direction. RAlways stow objects so they cannot be thrown around in these or similar situa- tions. RAlways ensure that objects do not pro- trude over the top of stowage compart- ments or ruffled pockets. RAll closable stowage compartments should be closed before beginning your journey. RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects or objects which are too large behind the last bench seat or under the passenger seats. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, particularly if the vehicle is mov- ing, exhaust fumes could enter the passenger compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. The handling characteristics of a laden vehi- cle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. Observe the following loading guidelines when loading and transporting luggage and loads: Rnever exceed the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle (including occu- pants). Rthe load must not protrude above the upper edge of the head restraints. Rensure that no items of luggage can enter the passenger compartment above or between the seats. Rensure that loaded objects are stowed safely and are secured. Rload heavy objects at the bottom and light objects at the top. Rthe load compartment is the preferred place to stow objects. Rstow heavy loads as far forwards and as low down in the load compartment as pos- sible. Opening the boot (smart fortwo coupé) ! The tailgates swing to the rear, both upwards and downwards, when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is suffi- cient clearance above, behind and below the tailgates. Stowing luggage and large objects 125

Loading and stowing. Z

X Press the % button on the key.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 133 · Applies to: 453

X Press button :. X Fold the upper tailgate upwards. X Pull lever : upwards. X Fold the lower tailgate down. Closing the boot (smart fortwo coupé) X Fold the lower tailgate upwards and engage on both sides. X Pull the upper tailgate down and press it closed. X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Opening the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) Opening the tailgate X Press the % button on the key. X Press button : in the handle recess. X Fold down the tailgate. Opening the rear soft top X Open the tailgate. X Press both latch levers :. X Swing the rear soft top up. Closing the boot (smart fortwo cabrio) Closing the rear soft top ! When closing the tailgate, you must first lock the tail cover. Otherwise, you could break the catch lever. X Pull the rear soft top down until it engages. X Lock the rear soft top with both latch lev- ers. 126 Stowing luggage and large objects

Loading and stowing.

Closing the tailgate

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 134 · Applies to: 453

X Pull the tailgate up until it engages. X Press the & button on the key. The vehicle is locked. Enlarging the load compartment: fold- ing the front-passenger seat backrest forwards Folding down the front-passenger seat backrest (using the lever) Seat with a lever X Lift lever ; and slide the front passenger seat to its rearmost position. X Pull lever : forwards. X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same time. Folding down the front-passenger seat backrest (using the handwheel) Seat with a handwheel X Turn handwheel : forward. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest Please note G WARNING If the seat backrest is not engaged, it may fold forwards, e.g. during braking or in the event of an accident. RAs a result, a backrest which is not engaged would press you into the seat belt. The seat belt cannot perform its intended protective function and could additionally cause injury. RThe backrest cannot restrain objects or loads in the boot. This poses an increased risk of injury. Before every journey, make sure that the backrest is engaged as described. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest (using the lever) X Pull lever :. X Push the seat backrest back at the same time until it engages. Folding back the front-passenger seat backrest (using the handwheel) X Turn handwheel : backwards. Using the boot separator Fitting the boot separator G WARNING On its own, the boot cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. Using the boot separator 127

Loading and stowing. Z

by using lashing material, even if you are

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 135 · Applies to: 453

using the boot cover. For easier fitting, fold the front-passenger seat backrest forwards. X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. X Hold boot separator : with the luggage net bag in the direction of the passenger compartment in the boot. X Insert the boot separator into bracket ; on the right side. X Slide handle ? to the right and hold. X Insert the boot separator into bracket ; on the left side. X Release handle. Boot separator : snaps into place. X Secure the luggage net bag with the Velcro fasteners. If the boot separator is not required and no subwoofer is installed, it can be attached to brackets =. Hooking in and unhooking the boot separator X Grip boot separator : in the middle and pull it back. X Hook boot separator into left and right rear brackets A. 128 Using the boot separator

Loading and stowing.

Useful information

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 136 · Applies to: 453

The engine compartment in the smart is located at the rear, below the boot. Here you can check the engine oil level and top up the engine oil. All other tanks for service fluids are located under the service cover at the front. When working on the vehicle, always comply with all safety regulations. Removing/fitting the subwoofer Removing the subwoofer X Release quick-release fastener : in the direction of the arrow. X Reach into the recess on the quick-release fastener. X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to the right. X Pull out the connector. Fitting the subwoofer X Insert the connector. X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side trim. X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards. X Press the bracket into the recess in side trim ;. X Turn quick-release fastener : to the right. Opening and closing the engine com- partment cover Please note G WARNING The engine compartment cover can become very hot. There is a risk of injury if you remove the engine compartment cover to work in the engine compartment. Allow the engine to cool down before removing the engine compartment cover. G WARNING Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. if the engine compartment cover has not been fitted correctly when the engine is running, particularly whilst the vehicle is moving, exhaust gases may enter the vehi- cle interior. There is a danger of poisoning. Always switch off the engine before removing the engine compartment cover. Make sure that the engine compartment cover has been fitted correctly. Opening and closing the engine compartment cover 129

Maintenance and care. Z

Opening the engine compartment

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 137 · Applies to: 453

cover The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and lower tailgate. X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail- gate. X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top up. X Vehicles with a subwoofer: remove the sub- woofer. X Vehicles with a boot separator: attach the hook to the upper bracket of boot separa- tor :. X Fold up the carpet. X Unscrew and remove screws = in the engine cover. X Remove engine cover ;. Closing the engine compartment cover X Slide engine compartment cover ; for- wards to the stop. X Tighten screws =. X Fold down the carpet and push it under the side panelling. X Vehicles with a subwoofer:fit the sub- woofer. X Vehicles with a boot separator:detach the hook on the boot separator. Opening and closing the service cover Please note G WARNING If the service cover is not locked, it may come loose during driving and block your view or endanger other road users. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, make sure that the service cover is locked before driving off. G WARNING If the windscreen wipers start to move when the service cover is open, you could become caught up in the wiper rods. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before you open the ser- vice cover. ! To ensure unhindered air intake, com- pletely remove any dirt or snow from the ventilation slots above the service cover. The vehicle must be secured against rolling away. On vehicles with a lockable service cover, the service cover must be unlocked before it is opened. Unlocking the service cover on vehicles with a lockable service cover X Remove lock cover : on driver's side. X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position u. 130 Opening and closing the service cover

Maintenance and care.

Opening the service cover

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 138 · Applies to: 453

X Pull both levers ; in the direction of the arrow. X Lift service cover = at the front. X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and upwards to remove it. X Hook top rear of service cover = into the openings on the vehicle. Closing the service cover X Lift service cover =. X Slide bars A on the left and right of the service cover under the bars on wing ?. X Press service cover = downwards. X Press both levers ; backwards in the direction of the arrow. Locking the service cover on vehicles with a lockable service cover X Insert the key into the lock and turn it to position 1. X Insert lock cover : on the driver's side and snap it into place. Checking service products and topping up Please note G WARNING Service product can be poisonous and haz- ardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Observe the instructions on the respective original container when using, storing and disposing off service products. Always store service products in the sealed origi- nal container. Always keep service prod- ucts out of the reach of children. H Environmental note Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally-responsible manner. Also observe the safety notes in the "Service products" section (Y page 190). Checking service products and topping up 131

Maintenance and care. Z

Service products include the following:

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 139 · Applies to: 453

RFuels (e.g. petrol, diesel) RLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) RCoolant RBrake fluid RWindscreen washer fluid RClimate control system refrigerant Service products approved by smart: http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com Checking the engine oil and topping up Checking the engine oil level G WARNING Certain components in the engine com- partment could be very hot, e.g. the engine, the radiator and parts of the exhaust sys- tem. There is a risk of injury when access- ing the engine compartment. As far as possible, allow the engine to cool down and only touch the components described in the following. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bon- net closed and notify the fire brigade. G WARNING There are moving components in the engine compartment. Certain components may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the ignition has been switched off, e.g. the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the engine compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rnever touch the dangerous areas sur- rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan Rremove jewellery and watches Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from moving parts. Depending on your driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.5 litres of oil per 1000 km. The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if it is frequently driven at high engine speeds. To check the engine oil, the vehicle must be parked on a flat surface. X If the engine has not been started for an extended period, e.g. overnight, the meas- urement can be carried out immediately. X If the engine is at normal operating tem- perature, wait 5 minutes before measuring. X If the engine was only started briefly and is not at normal operating temperature, switch off the engine and wait 30 minutes before carrying out the measurement. X Open the engine compartment cover. X Remove oil dip stick : from the guide tube and wipe it off. X Insert the oil dipstick fully into the guide tube. X Pull out the oil dipstick. X Read the engine oil level. The level must be between MIN = and MAX ;. 132 Checking service products and topping up

Maintenance and care.

Adding engine oil

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 140 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil does not spill out over the filler neck. Allow the engine to cool down and thoroughly clean the com- ponents that have come into contact with engine oil before you start the engine. ! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level is above the MAX mark on the dipstick, too much oil has been added. This can lead to engine damage or catalytic converter damage. Have excess oil siphoned off. ! Do not use any additives with the engine oil. This could damage the engine. H Environmental note When topping up the oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or water- ways, it is harmful to the environment. Information on tested and approved engine oils is available from any smart centre. smart recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. Overview of approved engine oils: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com, then enter the designation, e.g. 229.5. X Unscrew and remove cap :. X Top up with no more than 1 litre of recom- mended engine oil. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Check the engine oil level. X Close the engine compartment cover. i Regular engine oil changes using an approved engine oil from the suitable SAE classification are strongly recommended. Checking the coolant and topping up Checking the coolant level X Stop the vehicle on a level surface. X Let the coolant cool down for at least 30 minutes. X Open the service cover. X Check reservoir ; visually. The fluid level must be between the MIN mark and the MAX mark. Checking service products and topping up 133

Maintenance and care. Z

Topping up the coolant

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 141 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING The cooling system is pressurised, partic- ularly when the engine is warm. If you open the cap, you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out. There is a risk of injury. Let the engine cool down before you open the cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Open the cap slowly to release the pres- sure. ! Only add coolant that has been premixed with the desired antifreeze protection. You could otherwise damage the engine. Further information on coolants can be found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products, MB Specifications for Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or contact a qualified specialist workshop. If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present in the correct concentration, the boiling point of the coolant during operation is approx- imately 130 †. The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen- tration in the engine cooling system should be 50% (antifreeze protection down to -37 †). This will protect the engine cooling system against freezing down to approximately -25 †. X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ; with a cloth. X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec- essary, allow excess pressure to escape. X Turn the cap further and remove it. X Top up the coolant to the MAX level. X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it will go. X Close the service cover. i See "Technical data" for information on recommended coolants. Topping up the washer fluid G WARNING Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components in the front compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that windscreen washer con- centrate is not spilled next to the filler neck. X Open the service cover. X Pull cap : upwards at the tab. X If available, pull the removable nozzle up as far as the stop. X Top up with washer fluid. X If available, push the removable nozzle down and push it inside. X Replace and tightly screw on cap :. X Close the service cover. i See "Technical data" for information on windscreen washer fluid/antifreeze. Checking wheels and tyres G Warning A flat tyre severely impairs the driving, steering and braking characteristics of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediately replace the flat tyre with your spare wheel, or consult a qualified specialist workshop. G WARNING Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle. There is a risk of accident. 134 Checking wheels and tyres

Maintenance and care.

Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 142 · Applies to: 453

age and replace any damaged tyres imme- diately. G WARNING Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyre traction. The tyre is no longer able to dis- sipate water. This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa- ses, in particular where speed is not adap- ted to suit the driving conditions. There is a risk of accident. If the tyre pressure is too high or too low, tyres may exhibit different levels of wear at different locations on the tyre tread. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres. Minimum tyre tread depth for: Rsummer tyres: 3 mm RM+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally prescribed limit for the mini- mum tyre tread depth is reached. ! If unavoidable, you should drive over obstacles such as kerbs slowly and not at a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels or tyres. Modification work on the brake system and wheels is not permitted. The use of spacers or brake dust shields is not permitted. This invalidates the general operating permit for the vehicle. Check the wheels and tyres for damage at least once a month, as well as after driving off-road or on poorly surfaced roads. Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. The tyres only attain their max- imum performance after this distance. Vibrations, audible noises and unusual han- dling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side, can indicate damage to wheels or tyres. If you suspect a tyre defect: X Reduce vehicle speed. X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. X Check the wheels and tyres for damage. If you find no signs of damage, have the wheels and tyres checked at a specialist workshop. Changing a wheel Please note G WARNING Never interchange the front and rear wheels as they have different dimensions, e.g. size, offset etc. Otherwise, there could be a negative effect on the road holding and you could endanger yourself or others. G WARNING Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearing capacity and the approved maximum speed could lead to tyre damage or the tyre bursting. There is a risk of accident. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. G WARNING If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are used, the wheel brakes or suspension com- ponents may be damaged. There is a risk of an accident. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part. When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the correct: Rdesignation Rtype Changing a wheel 135

Maintenance and care. Z

When replacing tyres, make sure to fit the

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 143 · Applies to: 453

correct: Rdesignation Rmanufacturer Rtype ! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure monitor, electronic components are loca- ted in the wheel. Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve, since this could dam- age the electronic components. Only have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Position a suitable jack only on the jack- ing points intended for this purpose. Raise the vehicle for a short time only to change the wheel. Make sure the vehicle is on a suitable surface and that no-one is in the vehicle. Secure the vehicle using chocks and apply the parking brake. Rules for selecting new tyres ! For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use tyres and wheels which have been specifically approved by smart for your vehicle. These are specially adap- ted to the control systems, such as ABS or ESP®. Only use tyres and wheels specifically tested and approved by smart. Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addi- tion, when driving with a load, dimen- sional variations and different tyre defor- mation characteristics could cause the tyres to make contact with the bodywork and axle components. This could result in damage to the tyres or the vehicle. smart accepts no liability for damage resulting from the use of tyres or wheels other than those tested and approved. Information on wheels and tyres can be obtained at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a smart centre. The service life of tyres depends on various factors, including the following: RDriving style RTyre pressure RMileage Observe the following rules for selecting new tyres: RObserve country-specific regulations which stipulate or recommend a certain tyre type for the vehicle. ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type and make. ROnly tyres of the same size may be used on a single axle (left/right). ROnly use tyres of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres). RUse only wheel-tyre combinations approved by smart. RDo not wear tyres out too much. This oth- erwise significantly reduces the traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). RReplace tyres after six years at the latest. i Recommended tyre pressures for various operating states can be found on the tyre pressure table on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). You can find further information regarding tyres and wheels at specialist tyre retailers, at qualified specialist workshops and at any smart centre. Preparing to change a wheel X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground. X Apply the parking brake. X Position the front wheels to point straight ahead. X Vehicles with a manual transmis- sion:depress the clutch pedal and shift to either first or reverse gear. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. 136 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care.

Removing a wheel

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 144 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehi- cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. There is a risk of injury. Only position the jack at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically, directly under the jacking point of the vehicle. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. The threads of the wheel bolts and wheel hubs could otherwise be damaged when the bolts are tightened. Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps: X Using both hands, grasp two hub cap openings and remove the hub cap. Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap cov- ers: X Remove the wheel hub cover. X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheel bolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew the wheel bolts completely. Changing a wheel 137

Maintenance and care. Z

The vehicle may only be raised at the desig-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 145 · Applies to: 453

nated jacking points. The jacking points are located just behind the front wheel arches and just in front of the rear wheel arches. X Position jack ; under the triangular indentations for jacking point :. X Set the foot of the jack up vertically with respect to the jacking point on the vehicle. X Raise the vehicle with the jack until the tyre is at most 3 cm off the ground. X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts. X Remove the wheel. Fitting a wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose. As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or hub threads replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving. G WARNING The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts and bolts are not tightened to the specified tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Have the tightening torque immediately checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. G WARNING If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. ! When changing a wheel, use only wheel bolts that have been approved for the wheel rim and vehicle. Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota- tion only according to their direction of rota- tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indicates its correct direction of rotation. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and press it on. X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly. X Lower the vehicle all the way. X Remove the jack. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross- wise pattern in sequence indicated : to ?. The tightening torque must be 105 Nm. X Check the recommended tyre pressure and adjust if necessary. i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys- tem: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors. 138 Changing a wheel

Maintenance and care.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 146 · Applies to: 453

X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does not become trapped. X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheel with both hands until you hear the hub cap engage. X Check to make sure the hub cap is seated securely on the wheel. Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub cov- ers: X Fit the wheel hub cover. Storing wheels X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark place when not in use. X Protect against oil, grease and fuel. Using the tyre pressure monitor Useful information It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pres- sure suitable for the operating situation. The tyre pressure monitor issues a warning when the pressure drops in one or more of the tyres. The tyre pressure monitor works properly only if sensors are present in all four tyres, and after the monitor has learned the correct tyre pressure for the current operating sit- uation. This occurs automatically in most situations, but may also be specified after restarting the tyre pressure monitor. Before restarting, check the tyres for the recom- mended tyre pressure. The tyre pressure monitor does not provide a warning in the following cases: REven loss of pressure on multiple tyres RSudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to penetration by a foreign body RIncorrectly set tyre pressure The tyre pressure monitor has a yellow warning lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating a pressure loss or malfunction. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with a mono- chrome display) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X On the multifunction lever press the ´ button repeatedly until the ° and h symbols are displayed in the instrument cluster display. X Press and hold the a button on the mul- tifunction lever. The ° and h symbols will flash in the instrument cluster display for about 5 seconds. The two symbols then light up. The tyre pressure monitor is restarted. Restarting the tyre pressure monitor (on-board computer with colour dis- play) X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to the recommended value. X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor in the on-board computer. The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐ rent pressures as new reference val‐ ues? message appears in the display. X Select yes and press a to confirm. The display shows the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message. If the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message does not appear after 5 seconds, repeat the tyre pressure monitor restart. Using the tyre pressure monitor 139

Maintenance and care. Z

Checking the tyre pressures

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 147 · Applies to: 453

Please note G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. G WARNING If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tyre valves, the tyre valves may be over- loaded and malfunction, which can cause tyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres- sure monitoring systems will cause the tyre valve to remain open. This can also result in tyre pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by smart for your vehicle onto the tyre valve. G WARNING If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, the wheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre pressure that is too low may result in a tyre blow-out. There is a risk of accident. RCheck the tyre for foreign objects. RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the valve is leaking. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. H Environmental note Check the tyre pressure regularly, at least every 14 days. The table with the recommended tyre pres- sure for various operating conditions can be found on the driver's side door pillar (B-pillar). The tyre pressure table may also state air pressures for different load conditions. These are defined in the table as different numbers of passengers and amounts of lug- gage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are not specified, the tyre pressures stated on the tyre pressure table apply for all approved tyres. Checking and correcting the tyre pres- sure manually Only check the tyre pressure once the tyres have cooled down. X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km. X Park the vehicle away from direct sunlight for at least three hours. X Check the tyre pressure with a suitable tyre pressure gauge. 140 Checking the tyre pressures

Maintenance and care.

X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 148 · Applies to: 453

X Restart tyre pressure monitor. Using winter tyres G WARNING M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of less than 4 mm are not suitable for use in winter as they do not provide sufficient traction. There is a risk of accident. M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than 4 mm must be replaced. At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyres lose elasticity and therefore traction and braking power. Change the tyres on your vehicle therefore to M+S tyres. Using summer tyres at very cold temperatures could cause tears to form, thereby damaging the tyres permanently. smart cannot accept responsi- bility for this type of damage. Have the vehicle winterproofed at a qualified specialist workshop at the onset of winter. X At low temperatures, use only winter tyres marked with M+S. X When road conditions are wintry, use M+S tyres with the additional i snow- flake symbol. These tyres allow driving safety systems, e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the win- ter. X Use M+S tyres of the same make and tread on all wheels. X When driving with M+S tyres, observe the specified maximum permissible speed. X Use only tyre types and sizes approved for smart. X When using tyres with a specified direc- tion of rotation, observe the arrow on the sidewall indicating the tyre's direction of rotation. After fitting M+S tyres: X Check tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per- missible speed than that of the vehicle are fitted, affix an appropriate warning label in the driver's field of vision. Using the limiter, restrict the speed to the maximum permissible speed for M+S tyres. Using snow chains G WARNING If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may scrape against the vehi- cle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tyres. There is a risk of an accident. To avoid hazardous situations: Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels in pairs. ! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snow chains on steel wheels, you may damage the hub caps. Remove the hub caps from the relevant wheels before fitting the snow chains. For safety reasons, smart recommends that you only use snow chains that have been specially approved for your vehicle by smart. Further information can be obtained at a smart centre or a qualified specialist work- shop. X Observe country-specific regulations. X Use only snow chains approved for smart. X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels. X Use snow chains only on snow-covered roads. X When driving with snow chains fitted, do not exceed the maximum permissible speed of 50 km/h. Changing the window wiper blades Please note G WARNING If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Changing the window wiper blades 141

Maintenance and care. Z

Always switch off the windscreen wipers

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 149 · Applies to: 453

and ignition before changing the wiper blades. ! Never open the service cover or tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windscreen or rear window. Never fold a wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windscreen or rear window. Hold the wiper arm firmly when you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the window, the window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Changing the window wiper blades on the windscreen X Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the igni- tion lock. X Press the combination switch to position 2. The wiper arms will move upwards. X Turn the key to position 0 and remove it. X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- screen. X Press both release clips ; on mounting ? in the direction of arrow 3 and pull away from the wiper arm. X Slide window wiper blade : in the direc- tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook for the window wiper blade is revealed. X Remove the window wiper blade. X Slide new window wiper blade : in the direction of arrow 4 onto mounting = of wiper arm ;. The window wiper blade snaps into place. X Check that the window wiper blade is posi- tioned correctly. X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the wind- screen. Changing the rear window wiper blade (smart fortwo coupé) X Remove key from ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win- dow until you hear it engage. X Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it is released from the retainer on the wiper arm. X Pull out window wiper blade ;. X Press new window wiper blade ; onto wiper arm : until it engages. X Check that window wiper blade ; is posi- tioned correctly. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win- dow. 142 Changing the window wiper blades

Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the vehicle

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 150 · Applies to: 453

Useful information Regular care maintains the appearance and quality of the vehicle over time. Observe the following when cleaning and caring for the vehicle: X Use soft, moist cloths. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended and approved by smart. X Do not use acidic cleaning agents. X In winter, carefully remove road salt as soon as possible. Cleaning the vehicle exterior Cleaning the vehicle Preparing the vehicle for cleaning G WARNING Braking efficiency is reduced after the vehicle has been washed. There is a risk of an accident. After washing the vehicle, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic con- ditions in order to restore full braking effi- ciency. X Close the side windows completely. X Switch off the climate control blower. X Turn the windscreen wipers to position 0. Cleaning in an automatic car wash X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Remove excess dirt. X Drive through the automatic car wash. X Remove wax from the front windscreen and the wiper blades. i If the windscreen wipers leave smears after the vehicle has passed through the car wash, this may be caused by wax or other residue. This residue can be removed with washer fluid. Washing by hand X Locate a washing bay equipped for hand- washing. X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft vehicle sponge. X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gentle jet of water; do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille. X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois. Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- nents replaced immediately. ! Always maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the vehicle and the high- pressure cleaner nozzle. Information about the correct distance is available from the equipment manufacturer. Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not aim directly at any of the following: Rtyres Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc. Relectrical components Rbattery Rconnectors Rlights Rseals Rventilation slots Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning. X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm between the high-pressure cleaner nozzle and the vehicle. X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning. Cleaning the vehicle 143

Maintenance and care. Z

Cleaning the reversing camera

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 151 · Applies to: 453

X Clean camera lens : with water and a soft cloth. Cleaning the sensors X Clean sensors : with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. Cleaning the wheels G WARNING The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirt grinders) can cause damage not visible from the outside to tyres or chassis com- ponents. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of an accident. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with circular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged tyres or chassis compo- nents replaced immediately. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod- ucts to remove brake dust. This could dam- age wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park up your vehicle for a long period of time immediately after cleaning, particularly after cleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner may lead to increased corrosion of the brake discs and pads. You should therefore drive for a few minutes after cleaning. By heat- ing up the brakes, the brake discs and pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked up for a long period of time. X Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean- ing agent. Cleaning the exhaust pipe ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents, such as sanitary cleanser or wheel cleaner. X Clean the exhaust pipe with an acid-free cleaning agent. Cleaning the windows and windscreen wipers Cleaning the windows G WARNING If the windscreen wipers are set in motion when cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you could become trapped. There is a danger of injury. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the ignition before cleaning the wind- screen or wiper blades. X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the window. X Clean the inside and outside of the win- dows with a damp cloth and a cleaning agent recommended by smart. X Clear deposits regularly from the wind- screen and rear window to ensure that water can drain unhindered. 144 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the window wiper blades

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 152 · Applies to: 453

X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi- tion and fold them away from the window. X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft cloth. X Fold the wiper arms back into place. Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart fortwo coupé) ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage the plastic panes of the panorama roof. Do not use cleaning agents containing solvents X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len- ses and wipe off with a moist sponge. Cleaning the solid roof Dry cleaning X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Rinse with clean water. Cleaning the soft top (smart fortwo cab- rio) Useful information ! Never clean the soft top using a high- pressure cleaner as water could otherwise enter the vehicle interior. ! Only clean the folding roof and the rear soft top when they are closed. Dry cleaning X Brush from the front to the back using a soft brush. Wet cleaning X Dry clean first. X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and lukewarm water. X Rinse with clean water. Cleaning the exterior lighting X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len- ses and wipe off with a wet sponge. Cleaning and caring for paintwork ! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur- face. Adhesive residue could damage the paintwork. X Remove impurities immediately by rub- bing carefully. X Soak insect remains with insect remover and rinse off. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off. X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. X Use silicone remover to remove wax. X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care- fully with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. Cleaning the vehicle interior Cleaning the displays ! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol- lowing: Ralcohol-based thinner or petrol Rabrasive cleaning agents Rcommercially-available household cleaning agents These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface when cleaning. This could lead to irrepar- able damage to the display. X Switch off the display and let it cool down. X Clean the display surface with a microfibre cloth and cleaner for TFT/LC displays. X Dry the display surface using a dry micro- fibre cloth. Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or selector lever X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leather care agent recommended by smart. Cleaning the vehicle 145

Maintenance and care. Z

Cleaning the seat belts

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 153 · Applies to: 453

G WARNING Seat belts may be severely weakened if bleached or coloured. This may lead to the seat belts, for example, tearing or failing in an accident. There is an increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal. Never bleach or colour seat belts. ! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi- cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts at temperatures above 80 † or in direct sunlight. X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarm soapy water. Cleaning and caring for seats Please note ! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen- uine leather or artificial leather covers, as these are too aggressive and, if used often, may damage the cover. Regular care maintains the appearance and feel of the seats over time. Cleaning and caring for genuine leather seat covers X Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat covers. Do not allow the leather to become soaked. X Wipe off with a dry cloth. X Apply a leather care agent recommended by smart. Cleaning synthetic leather seat covers X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean the seat covers. Cleaning cloth seat covers X Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent water. X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire sections of the cover. X Allow the seat to dry. Cleaning DINAMICA seat covers X Wet a cloth with water. X Clean entire sections of the cover. Cleaning the artificial leather cover of the dashboard (BRABUS) X Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean. Cleaning the trim Cleaning the plastic trim G WARNING Care products and cleaning agents con- taining solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. This could result in plastic parts breaking away when the airbags are deployed. There is a danger of injury. Do not use care products and cleaning agents containing solvents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic sur- faces: Rstickers Rfilms Rscented oil bottles or similar items You could otherwise damage the plastic. To maintain the appearance of high-quality plastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces to come into contact with cosmetics, insect repellents or sun creams. X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended by smart to remove heavy soiling. Cleaning the roof lining (smart fortwo coupé) X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or a cleaning agent recommended by smart. Cleaning the carpets X Use carpet and textile cleaning agents rec- ommended by smart. 146 Cleaning the vehicle

Maintenance and care.

Cleaning the trim elements

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 154 · Applies to: 453

! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover, wheel clean- ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damaging the surface. X Clean the trim elements with a moist microfibre cloth. X Use care products and cleaning agents recommended by smart to remove heavy soiling. Observing service due dates The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in the instrument cluster display are reminders of upcoming service due dates: R¯: minor service. R°: major service. Monochrome display: the indicator lamp flashes for a few seconds after the engine is started. Depending on the operating condi- tions of the vehicle, the time or distance remaining until the service is due, is also displayed. The service interval is based on normal oper- ation of the vehicle. Observe the following if the vehicle is operated under arduous con- ditions or increased loads, e.g. regular city driving with frequent intermediate stops: X Carry out service work more often than specified by the service interval. X Have the air filter, engine oil and oil filter changed more frequently. X Check the tyres more frequently. Current information on the type of service can be obtained at a smart centre or a quali- fied specialist workshop. Parking up the vehicle ! Please note that if the vehicle is not used for prolonged periods, vehicle damage may occur and the battery may discharge or become damaged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for a consultation. Parking up the vehicle 147

Maintenance and care. Z

Securing the vehicle in the event of an

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 155 · Applies to: 453

accident or a breakdown Securing the vehicle ! When a tyre is damaged, the danger area must be kept clear of all persons. X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid, non-slippery ground. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. X Switch off the engine. X Passengers should leave the vehicle. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Set up the warning triangle. In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT the vehicle cannot be made roadworthy again using the on-board equipment. You cannot place an emergency call using the smart Audio-System. The vehicle owner and the driver are responsible for equipping the vehicle with an appropriate breakdown kit and seeking assistance in the event of a breakdown. Switching the hazard warning lamps on and off If the hazard warning lamps are activated, all turn signals flash. The hazard warning lamps automatically switch on in the following cases: Ran airbag is deployed. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 70 km/h and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off auto- matically if a speed of 10 km/h is exceeded again after full brake application. X Press button :. Securing the vehicle against rolling away Securing on level ground X When changing a wheel, place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo- site the wheel you wish to change. Securing on a downhill gradient 148 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Place wheel chocks or other suitable items

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 156 · Applies to: 453

in front of the wheels of the front and rear axle. Using the warning triangle Removing the warning triangle The warning triangle is secured behind the driver's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. X Fold the driver's seat forwards. X Remove warning triangle :. Setting up the warning triangle X Fold feet 3 out to the side. X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a triangle. X Connect the reflectors using upper stud 1. X Place the warning triangle at a suitable distance. Removing the first-aid kit i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace any missing parts. The first-aid kit is secured behind the driv- er's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener. Return it to this location after use. X Fold the driver's seat forwards. X Remove first-aid kit :. Removing the fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher is located underneath the front passenger seat. Removing the vehicle tool tray The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are loca- ted in the vehicle tool tray under the glove compartment. X Remove bolts in the front-passenger foot- well. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. Removing the vehicle tool tray 149

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 157 · Applies to: 453

Useful information The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used to seal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre tread, at outside tempera- tures of up to -20 †. Please note G WARNING In the following situations, the tyre seal- ant is unable to provide sufficient break- down assistance, as it is unable to seal the tyre properly: Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyre larger than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres- sures or on a flat tyre. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. G WARNING The tyre sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing or be swal- lowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tyre sealant away from children. There is a risk of injury. If you come into contact with the tyre seal- ant, observe the following: RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skin immediately with water. RIf the tyre sealant comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water. RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi- ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med- ical attention immediately. G WARNING A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the driving characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of accident. You should therefore adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the specified maximum speed with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. ! After use, excess tyre sealant may run out of the filler hose. This could cause stains. Therefore, place the filler hose in the plas- tic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Comply with the manufacturer's safety instructions on the sticker on the tyre infla- tion compressor. Filling with tyre sealant X Leave foreign bodies which have penetra- ted the tyre in the tyre. X Remove the vehicle tool tray. X Remove the TIREFIT Kit, consisting of a tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflation compressor, from the vehicle tool kit. X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. 150 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyre

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 158 · Applies to: 453

inflation compressor ;. X Remove hose A from the bottom section of tyre inflation compressor ;. X Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot- tle ?. X Connect hose A. X Remove valve flap from valve E on the faulty tyre. X Unscrew cap from filler hose =. X Screw filler hose = onto valve E. X Insert connector : into the cigarette lighter socket or the 12 V socket. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 1. X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation compressor ; to position 1. The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approx- imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar, 86 psi). i Preventing damage to the tyre inflation compressor Do not switch off the tyre inflation com- pressor during this phase. X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of 15 minutes, then allow it to cool down. The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi). Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It can then be removed like a layer of film. Have any clothing stained with tyre sealant cleaned as soon as possible with perchloro- ethylene. Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is below 180 kPa G WARNING If the specified tyre pressure still cannot be reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. Damaged tyres and low tyre pressures can significantly impair the vehicle's braking and driving character- istics. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a quali- fied specialist workshop. X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Slow move the vehicle approximately 10 m forwards or backwards. X Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar, 26 psi). Further procedure if the pressure of the sealed tyre is at least 180 kPa X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 151

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 159 · Applies to: 453

inflation compressor. X Perform a test drive. The maximum permissible speed for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h. X Stop after driving for approximately 3 km and check the tyre pressure with the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise values are located on the door pillar (B-pillar) on the driver's side. X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on the sealed tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may escape when unscrewing. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filler hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre changed there. X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hose replaced as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjusting the tyre pressure Increasing the tyre pressure X Switch on the tyre inflation compressor. X Observe the display. Reducing the tyre pressure X Press button : next to pressure gauge ;. i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effec- tiveness over time. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist work- shop. Jump-starting and charging the bat- tery Please note G WARNING Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can lead, for example, to a short circuit and thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can lead to function restrictions applying to safety-relevant systems, e.g the light- ing system, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The operating safety of your vehicle may be restricted. You could lose control of the vehicle, for example: Rwhen braking Rin the event of abrupt steering manoeu- vres and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions There is a risk of an accident. In the event of a short circuit or a similar incident, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Do not drive any further. Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist work- shop. Further information about ABS (Y page 46) and ESP® (Y page 47). G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the bat- tery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, cre- ating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. 152 Jump-starting and charging the battery

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

G WARNING

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 160 · Applies to: 453

During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explo- sion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jump leads. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running. G WARNING Electrostatic build-up can lead to the cre- ation of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle body to remove any existing elec- trostatic build-up. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth- ing. Do not breathe in any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep the batter- ies out of the reach of children. Immedi- ately rinse off battery acid thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medi- cal attention at once. G WARNING A discharged battery can freeze at tem- peratures below freezing point. When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting. RIf the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at tem- peratures around or below freezing point, it is very likely that the discharged bat- tery has frozen. In this case do not jump- start the vehicle or charge the battery. RThe service life of a battery that has been thawed may be reduced drastically. RThe starting characteristics may be impaired, especially at low temperatures. RHave the thawed battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ! Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in exceptional circumstances, be absolutely necessary to disconnect the battery yourself, please observe the fol- lowing: Rswitch off the engine and remove the key. Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Other- wise, you may damage electronic com- ponents such as the alternator, for example. Rfirst, disconnect the negative terminal clamp, followed by the positive terminal clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. The vehicle electronics may otherwise be damaged. Ron vehicles with automatic transmis- sion, the transmission is locked in posi- tion P after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle is secured against rolling away. You can then no longer move the vehicle. The battery and the cover of the positive terminal clamp must be fitted securely during operation. ! Do not make any attempt to start the vehicle if the on-board voltage is low (e.g. weak lighting) or 3 is shown in the dis- play. A starting attempt could damage the Jump-starting and charging the battery 153

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

batteries if they are cold or not fully

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 161 · Applies to: 453

charged. ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic con- verter could be damaged by the non-com- busted fuel. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling sys- tem. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. For safety reasons, smart recommends using only batteries which have been approved for your vehicle by smart. These batteries pro- vide increased leakage protection in the event of an accident. Jump-starting When jump-starting, observe the following rules: RAvoid multiple or lengthy starting attempts. RDo not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RFor jump-starting, use only batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V. ROnly use jump leads that have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the donor battery connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. RMake sure that the jump leads are not dam- aged. RDo not allow non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps to come into contact with other metal parts while the jump leads are connected to the battery. RThe jump leads must not come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is running, e.g. the wiper rods or the fan. X Secure the vehicle using the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window heating or lighting. X Turn the key in the ignition lock to position 0. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Open the service cover. A Charged donor battery or an equivalent jump-starting device X Remove the protective cap from positive terminal : of your battery. X First connect positive terminal : of your battery to positive terminal ; of donor battery A using the jump lead. X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. X First connect negative terminal = of donor battery A and then negative ter- minal ? of your battery using the jump lead. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jump leads, let both engines run for several minutes. 154 Jump-starting and charging the battery

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X To disconnect the jump leads, follow the

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 162 · Applies to: 453

sequence in reverse. X Attach protective cap to positive termi- nal :. X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessi- ble, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device. Charging the battery In order to prevent damage, observe the fol- lowing requirements: RUse only battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. RCharge the battery using only a battery charger approved by smart. When using another battery charger, remove the battery before charging. RObserve the operating instructions for the battery charger. X Open the service cover. X Remove the protective cap from positive terminal : on the battery. X Connect positive terminal : on the bat- tery to positive terminal ; on battery charger A. X Connect negative terminal = on battery charger A to negative terminal ? on the battery. The vehicle battery should always be suffi- ciently charged to achieve the maximum possible service life. The battery may dis- charge over time if the vehicle is not used. To charge the battery, a battery charger rec- ommended by smart can be connected. If the vehicle is unused for an extended period, the battery should be checked fre- quently or disconnected at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. A battery charger adapted to and approved by smart allows the charging of the battery in its installed position. Further information is available from any smart Centre. Towing and tow-starting the vehicle Please note G WARNING Safety relevant functions are restricted or no longer available if: Rthe engine is not running Rthe brake system or power steering is malfunctioning Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system When your vehicle is towed away or towed started, you may require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Before being towed away or tow started, make sure the steering moves freely. G WARNING If the steering wheel lock is engaged, the vehicle can no longer be steered. There is a risk of an accident. Always switch on the ignition when towing with a tow rope or a towing bar. G WARNING When towing or tow-starting another vehicle and its weight is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle, the: Rtowing eye may be torn off Rcar/trailer combination may swerve or even overturn There is a risk of an accident. When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Information on the vehicle's permissible gross mass can be found on the vehicle iden- tification plate (Y page 188). Towing and tow-starting the vehicle 155

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

! Observe the following points when tow-

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 163 · Applies to: 453

ing with a tow rope: Rsecure the tow rope on the same side on both vehicles. Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer than legally permitted. Mark the tow rope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth (30 x 30 cm). This makes other road users aware that a vehicle is being towed. Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing eye. Robserve the brake lamps of the towing vehicle while driving. Always maintain a distance so that the tow rope does not sag. Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow your vehicle. You could otherwise dam- age the vehicle. ! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery purposes as this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane. ! Pull away smoothly when towing away or tow-starting a vehicle. If the tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. ! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of 50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. For towing distances over 50 km, the entire vehicle must be lifted up and transported. Observe the legal requirements for the rele- vant countries when towing and tow start- ing. Preference should be given to transporting rather than towing. Vehicles with automatic transmission: when being towed, the transmission must be in position N. i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off the automatic locking feature. The driver could otherwise be locked out when push- ing or having the vehicle towed. i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted: Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car- rier fitted. Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to the basic carrier. Vehicles with automatic transmission: observe the notes on the selector lever when towing away the vehicle. Fitting the towing eye The towing eye can be attached to the front or rear of the vehicle. X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool tray. X Carefully prise off cover : on the vehicle. X Screw in the towing eye to the stop. Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground Vehicles with automatic transmission: X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the automatic transmission to position N. The selector lever lock can be manually released in the event of an electrical mal- function. 156 Towing and tow-starting the vehicle

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Release the brake pedal.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 164 · Applies to: 453

X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. Vehicles with manual transmission: X Leave the key in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Release the brake pedal. X Release the parking brake. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. Towing the vehicle with the rear axle raised X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Deactivate automatic door locking. X Turn the front wheels to the straight- ahead position. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. Transporting the vehicle ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. The vehicle could otherwise be damaged. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. Move the transmission to position N. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. As soon as the vehicle is loaded: X Apply the parking brake. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: shift the transmission to position P. X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear. X Remove the key. X Lash down the vehicle. Emergency engine starting by tow starting The following conditions must be met before tow starting: RThe battery is connected. RThe engine has cooled down. RThe exhaust system has cooled down. X Switch on the hazard warning lights. X Fit the towing eye. X Attach the tow bar or tow rope. X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: activate the manual gearshift setting. X Vehicles with manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully, engage sec- ond gear and keep the clutch pedal fully depressed. X Release the brake pedal. X Tow start the vehicle. X Vehicles with automatic transmission: push the selector lever forwards towards q until the engine starts. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while doing so. X Vehicles with manual transmission: with- out depressing the accelerator pedal, release the clutch pedal slowly. X Vehicles with manual transmission: when the engine is started, immediately depress the clutch pedal fully and select neutral. X Keep the engine running by accelerating. X Pull over at a suitable place and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the parking brake. X Remove the tow bar or tow rope. X Remove the towing eye. Removing the towing eye X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach the cover to the recess at the top and engage it at the bottom. X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool tray. Towing and tow-starting the vehicle 157

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

Manually releasing the selector lever

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 165 · Applies to: 453

lock The selector lever lock can be manually released in the event of an electrical mal- function, e.g. if the parking lock has been deactivated for towing and should subse- quently be re-applied. ! Do not use any sharp-edged objects to prise out the cover from the centre console. Otherwise, the cover or the centre console could be damaged. X Apply the parking brake. X Prise out cover : on the centre console from bottom edge ; using with a flat, blunt object. X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Pull yellow release = behind the trim up and simultaneously press release but- ton ? on the selector lever. X Shift the selector lever to N or P. Replacing the bulbs Useful information G WARNING Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors can become very hot during use. When replac- ing a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury. Allow these components to cool down before replacing the bulb. G WARNING The radiator fan may continue to move or suddenly move again even after the engine is switched off. There is a risk of injury. If you have to carry out work in the front compartment: Rswitch off the ignition Rremove jewellery and watches Rnever touch the rotation area of the fan Rkeep items of clothing and hair, for example, away from the fan Observe the following rules when changing bulbs: ROnly replace bulbs when the engine is switched off. RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or show signs of visible damage, e.g. scratches. RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare hands. ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed for that purpose. ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and with a specified voltage. RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact with moisture. RHave LED bulbs changed at qualified spe- cialist workshops only. Change only the bulbs described below your- self in accordance with the specified bulb types. 158 Replacing the bulbs

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Replacing front bulbs

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 166 · Applies to: 453

Changing dipped-beam and main-beam

headlamps

X Switch off the lights.

X Open the service cover.

X Remove cover :.

X Pull out the connector.

X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left.

X Pull the bulb out.

X Insert the new bulb.

X Lock the retainer.

X Insert the connector.

X Replace and engage cap :.

Changing the front turn signal lamps

X Switch off the lights.

X Turn the respective front wheel inwards.

X Push clamp : downwards.

X Remove cover ; upwards.

X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and

remove it.

X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb.

X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.

X Insert and engage the cover.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps

X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :.

X Prise out side turn signal ;.

X Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.

X Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Changing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

Tail lamp and brake lamp ; Rear foglamp = Reversing lamp ? Turn signals Replacing the bulbs 159

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

Tail lamps with partial LEDs

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 167 · Applies to: 453

Turn signals

; Reversing lamp

Removing the tail lamp cover

X Switch off the lights.

X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and

lower tailgate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail-

gate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top

up.

X Loosen screws :.

X Remove the tail lamp.

X Carefully insert a flat tool under the plas-

tic hanger on the tail lamp.

X Lift the connector and remove it.

Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

Tail lamp/brake lamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) ; Turn signals = Reversing lamp ? Rear foglamp (vehicles without partial LEDs) X Release four tabs A on the bulb holder. X Remove the bulb holder. X Pull the faulty bulb out. X Insert the new bulb. X Refit the bulb holder. X Insert the connector. X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it engage. X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp. Replacing the licence plate lighting X Insert a flat tool into recess :. X Remove the cover from the licence plate lamp. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate lamp. 160 Replacing the bulbs

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Replacing the interior lighting

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 168 · Applies to: 453

X Insert a flat tool into the recess. X Prise out lamp lens :. X Remove the bulb from the holder. X Insert the new bulb into the holder. X Refit the lamp lens. Changing fuses Please note G WARNING If you manipulate, bridge or replace a faulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper- age, the electric cables could be overloa- ded. This may result in a fire. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses of the correct amperage. ! Only use fuses that have been approved for smart vehicles and which have the cor- rect fuse rating for the system concerned. Components or systems could otherwise be damaged. ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box when the cover is open. The electrical fuses disconnect defective cir- cuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected com- ponents and their functions will fail. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed in the fuse allocation chart (Y page 190). If new fuses blow, the cause for this must be diagnosed and rectified at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Preparing the vehicle to change a fuse X Apply the parking brake. X Switch off all electrical consumers. X Turn key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Check whether all indicator lamps in the instrument cluster are off. Changing a fuse (left-hand drive vehi- cle) ! Do not use a pointed object such as a screwdriver to open the cover in the dash- board. You could damage the dashboard or the cover. X Open the front-passenger door. X Open the glove compartment. X To open: open cover : in the direction of the arrow. X Replace faulty fuse. X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it engages. X Close the glove compartment. Changing fuses 161

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

Changing a fuse (right-hand drive

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 169 · Applies to: 453

vehicle) X Open the driver’s door. X Turn quick-release fastener ; by 90° using a suitable object. X Fold down cover :. X Replace faulty fuse. X Close cover :. X Close quick-release fastener ;. Replacing the key battery G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub- stances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. H Environmental note Batteries contain pollu- tants. It is illegal to dis- pose of them with the household rubbish. They must be collected sepa- rately and disposed of in an environmentally responsible recycling sys- tem. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally respon- sible manner. Take dis- charged batteries to a qualified specialist work- shop or to a collection point for used batteries. X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :. X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess. X Turn the tool until the cover of the battery tray opens. X Replace battery = with the positive ter- minal facing upwards. X Replace the cover on the battery tray and push it closed. 162 Replacing the key battery

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

X Fixed keys: tighten screw :.

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 170 · Applies to: 453

X Check the function of all key buttons. Opening a door with the emergency release The vehicle can be opened using the emer- gency release if this is not possible using the remote control key. If the driver's door is unlocked and opened with the key in the emergency release, the anti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm. To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition. X Carefully remove the cover from the emer- gency release. X Insert the key into the emergency release on the driver's door. X Turn the key anti-clockwise. X Remove the key from the lock. X Push the cover into the emergency release until it engages. X Open the door. X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft alarm system, switch on the ignition. On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer- gency release is located on the front- passenger door. Locking the doors in an emergency Locking the doors with the locking but- ton X Open the driver’s door. X Close the other doors and the tailgate. X Press and hold button :. An audible lock- ing and unlocking sound can be heard. Wait until the third (locking) sound, before releasing button :. X Leave the vehicle and close the driver's door. The doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap are locked. The anti-theft alarm system is primed. X From the outside, check that the doors, tailgate and fuel filler cap are locked. Locking the doors with the emergency locking X Insert the key into slot : on the left door. X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it will go to position 2. X Close the left door. Locking the doors in an emergency 163

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns. Z

X Repeat the procedure described above on

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 171 · Applies to: 453

the right door. X Check that the doors are locked. i If you lock the vehicle using the emer- gency locking, the tailgate and fuel filler flap are not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not primed. 164 Locking the doors in an emergency

Dealing with accidents and breakdowns.

Notes on display messages

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 172 · Applies to: 453

The display shows warnings, malfunctions or additional information. A warning tone also sounds with some display messages. Messages from all categories can contain important information that must be observed. Have error messages checked at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon as possible. If an error message is not followed up with a repair, this can lead to damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty including injuries or material damage. Display messages with graphic symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols in the display. Colour display: low-priority display mes- sages can be hidden by pressing a on the steering wheel. High-priority messages are shown in red. The display messages are then stored in the message memory and can be called up for as long as the ignition remains switched on. Switching off the ignition clears the message memory. Locking and unlocking Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Key will not lock or unlock the vehicle. A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal. X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehicle again. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lock the vehicle with emergency locking. X Replace the key battery. Key is faulty. To lock: X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds. The vehicle still will not lock. X Lock driver's door using emergency locking. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To unlock: X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer. Side window will not close or will not open or close fully. Objects are obstructing the window guide. X Remove objects. Locking and unlocking 165

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 173 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Side window is not reset. G WARNING While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing area could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again. X Close all doors. X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock. X Push switch for closing the window until the window is closed, and then pull the switch for one second. The side window opens again a little way. X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed after releasing the switch. Fuel filler flap will not open. Fuel filler flap is not unlocked. X Unlock vehicle. Key battery is low or discharged. X Unlock vehicle using the emergency key element in the emer- gency release. C Red warning lamp is lit. If the speed exceeds 20 km/h, a warning tone also sounds. Colour display: the dis- play shows an open door/tailgate. Door or tailgate is open. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Close all doors and the tailgate. 166 Locking and unlocking

Practical advice.

Visibility, occupants, airbags

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 174 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Exterior mirror is not engaged. The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards by force. X Carefully move exterior mirror to the correct position. Windscreen wipers have malfunctioned. Windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds. Windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Windscreen wiper will not stop or always wipes at the same speed. Combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove key from ignition lock. X Insert key in ignition lock, turn to position 1 and start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 7 Red warning lamp lights up for six seconds after start- ing the engine (certain countries only). Warning tone sounds. Warning lamp prompts driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. X Fasten seat belts. 7 Red warning lamp lights up after starting the engine. Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. X Fasten seat belts. 7 Red warning lamp flashes. Warning tone sounds. Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and the vehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h. X Fasten seat belts. Visibility, occupants, airbags 167

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 175 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Mal‐ function Visit work‐ shop appears. Restraint system is malfunctioning. G WARNING If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or may not deploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 4 Indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. The front-passenger front airbag has been deactivated (Y page 35). X Activate front-passenger front airbag. Front-passenger front airbag has not been deactivated and is malfunctioning. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front- passenger seat. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. × Indicator lamp on the overhead control panel lights up. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 35). The air- bag system is operating correctly. X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front- passenger seat. × Indicator lamp on the overhead control panel does not light up if the front-passenger front airbag has been activated manually. Malfunction in the airbag system. X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 168 Visibility, occupants, airbags

Practical advice.

Engine, brakes, transmission

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 176 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Engine will not start using the key. Steering lock is manually locked. X Remove key from ignition lock and then reinsert it into the ignition lock. X Turn the key. X Turn steering wheel left and right. Engine will not start. Starter motor cannot be heard. On-board voltage is too low. X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. X Start the engine. The engine still does not start. X Jump-start the vehicle. The engine will not start despite jump-starting. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Starter motor has overheated. X Let the starter motor cool down for two minutes. X Start the engine. The engine still does not start. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine will not start. Starter motor can be heard. Engine electronics or fuel delivery system is malfunctioning. X Switch off the engine. X Start the engine. Lengthy and frequent starting attempts will drain the battery. The engine will not start after several attempts. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine will not start. Starter motor can be heard. The fuel tank gauge is at zero. Fuel tank is empty. X Refuel the vehicle. Engine is not running smoothly and is mis- firing. Malfunction in the engine electronics or a mechanical component. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Engine, brakes, transmission 169

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 177 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel leaking from vehi- cle. Fuel line or fuel tank is faulty. G WARNING Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smok- ing. Switch off the engine and, if applicable, the auxiliary heat- ing before refuelling. X Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ; Yellow warning lamp flashes while driving. Risk of misfiring. Ignition system is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ; Yellow warning lamp lights up and engine output is reduced. Colour dis- play:Reduced power See Owner's Manual appears. Engine is running in emergency mode. Ignition system may be malfunctioning. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ; Yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Malfunction in one or more of the following components: REngine management RExhaust system RFuel system RAccelerator pedal sensor X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: 8 lights up. Low fuel level appears. The amount of fuel in the tank has reached the reserve range. X Refuel as soon as possible. 170 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 178 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? Red warning lamp lights up. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop Switch off engine appears. The coolant level is too low or the air supply to the engine radiator is restricted. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and the coolant temperature exceeds 110 †. G WARNING If you open the bonnet while the engine is overheating or while there is a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other leaking service products. There is a danger of injury. Allow an overheating engine to cool down before opening the bonnet. If there is a fire in the engine compartment, leave the bonnet closed and notify the fire brigade. X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions, and switch off the engine. X Leave the vehicle and allow the engine to cool down. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by frozen slush. X Check the coolant level and top up if necessary. The coolant level is sufficient. The electric engine radiator fan has failed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ? Red warning lamp lights up. Warning tone sounds. Stop Switch off motor appears. The coolant is too hot. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away with the parking brake. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels. 5 Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Stop Switch off engine appears. Oil pressure is too low. ! Check the oil level regularly. If there is insufficient oil (oil level is below the MIN mark), there is a risk of engine failure. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Check the engine oil level. X If necessary, top up the engine oil. Engine, brakes, transmission 171

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 179 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Check brake fluid level appears. Brake fluid level is too low. G WARNING If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail. There is a risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not drive any further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immedi- ately and have the brake system repaired. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Red warning lamp lights up while driv- ing. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Release parking brake appears. Parking brake is applied. X Release the parking brake. ç Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving and when sta- tionary. Colour display:Mal‐ function See Own‐ er's Manual appears. The automatic start/stop system is malfunctioning and has been automatically switched off. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ç Yellow warning lamp lights up when stationary. Not all conditions for the automatic start/stop system have been met. X Please take note of the conditions for the automatic start/stop system. è Green indicator lamp flashes during automatic engine switch-off. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: When exiting: remove key appears. Automatic start/stop system has automatically switched off the engine, driver's door has been opened or seat belt has been unfastened. X Close the driver's door. X Fasten seat belts. X Restart the engine. When leaving the vehicle: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Remove key from ignition lock. 172 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 180 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions è Green indicator lamp flashes while the vehicle is stationary. Vehicles with manual transmission: the vehicle is at a standstill. No stop preventers are active. The clutch pedal is fully depressed. The engine is not switched off automatically. The flashing indi- cator lamp is intended to remind you to activate the automatic start/stop system in order to save fuel. X Shift into neutral and release clutch pedal slowly. Engine is switched off automatically. è Green indicator lamp flashes. Colour display: To start engine: oper‐ ate the clutch appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: the engine has stalled. X Depress the clutch pedal. The engine starts. è Green indicator lamp flashes. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: the engine has stalled. X Select neutral. The engine starts. Monochrome display: i flashes in the centre of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral or depress clutch appears when starting the engine. Vehicles with manual transmission: gear is selected and the clutch pedal is not fully depressed when starting the engine. X Depress the clutch pedal fully. If the engine fails to start despite the clutch pedal being fully depressed, then the clutch sensor is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display: To start engine: shift to neutral appears when the engine is started. Vehicles with manual transmission: clutch sensor is malfunction- ing. X Select neutral. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Monochrome display: i flashes in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: Park‐ ing lock malfunc‐ tion. To park: apply parking brake appears when starting the engine. Warning tone sounds. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the parking lock is mal- functioning. The vehicle is not secured against rolling away. X Apply the parking brake to park. Engine, brakes, transmission 173

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 181 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Monochrome display: i or j flash alter- nately in the middle of the display. Colour display:To start engine: shift to P or N appears. An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in position D or R. X Shift to P or N to start. Monochrome display: i or h / k flash alternately in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: shift to N appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: engine switches off while the vehicle is in motion. X Shift to N to start. Monochrome display: e flashes for 15 seconds in the mid- dle of the display. Colour display: To start engine: apply brake appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: an attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission in position N without applying the brake. X Depress the brake pedal. Monochrome display: j or h / k i flash alternately. Warning tone sounds. Colour display:Risk of vehicle rolling away Transmission not in P appears. Warning tone sounds. Vehicles with automatic transmission: driver's door is open and selector lever is in position R, N or D. G WARNING The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. X Shift to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Close the driver's door completely. Monochrome display: S lights up. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Vehicles with manual transmission: electronics are malfunction- ing. The system deactivates the automatic start/stop system and cruise control. X Depress clutch pedal fully to start the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. S lights up. Colour display: Trans‐ mission malfunction Visit workshop appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: automatic transmission is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 174 Engine, brakes, transmission

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 182 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions S flashes alter- nately with the current transmission position j / h / k / i. Colour display:Clutch protection active See Owner's Manual appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: other pulling away proce- dures result in the clutch overheating. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. X Wait until the automatic transmission has cooled down and the display message does not reappear after acknowledging it. S flashes alter- nately with the current transmission position j / h / k / i. Warning tone sounds. Colour display:Trans‐ mission overheated See Owner's Manual appears. Vehicles with automatic transmission: automatic transmission clutch has overheated. You will feel the clutch pedal pulsate. X Avoid pulling away or crawling manoeuvres. If the display message disappears, automatic transmission is available again. Vehicles with auto- matic transmission: has faulty gear shifts. Transmission is losing oil. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Vehicles with auto- matic transmission: acceleration charac- teristics are deterio- rating. Transmission no lon- ger shifts into all of the gears. Reverse gear can no longer be selected. Transmission is in emergency mode. X Stop. X Shift transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds. X Start the engine. X Shift transmission to position D. X Have the transmission checked immediately at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. ¯ or ° warning lamp flashes for a few seconds after starting the engine. Colour display: Next service in … km or Service due … km ago appears. A service due date is approaching or has already passed: R¯ indicates a minor service. R° indicates a full service. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine, brakes, transmission 175

Practical advice. Z

Driving safety systems

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 183 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! Yellow warning lamp lights up. ò (USA only) or ! (Canada only) Yellow warning lamp lights up. Colour display: System inoperative appears. ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva- ted. If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving sys- tems may be unavailable. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and display messages which may be shown in the instrument cluster . G WARNING If ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when you brake. This will greatly impair the driver's ability to steer and brake. In addition, further driving safety systems are deactivated. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. Drive on carefully. Have the ABS checked at a qualified spe- cialist workshop immediately. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. J Red warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Brake force distribution inoperative. Stop See Owner's Manual appears. EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, Crosswind Assist and Hill start assist are also unavailable. Other driving systems may be deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance may increase in emergency brak- ing situations. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehicle. The danger of skidding and having an accident increases. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 176 Driving safety systems

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 184 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ Monochrome dis- play: yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. ÷ Colour display: Yellow warning lamp lights up. System inoperative appears. ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systems may be deactivated. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not drive on. X Check that the brake lamps are working. The brake lamps are not working. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Brake lamps are working. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ Yellow warning lamp flashes while driving. ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at least one of the wheels is spinning. X Pull away carefully. X Accelerate carefully whilst driving. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi- tions. ÷ and C other warning lamps are lit. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 177

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 185 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Colour display: ÷ Hill start assist inoperative appears. Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held auto- matically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling imme- diately. G WARNING If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi- cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Other driving systems may be deactivated. The brake system functions normally, but without hill start assist. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Cor‐ rect tyre pressure appears. The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyre pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check tyre pressure. X Correct the tyre pressure. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. 178 Driving safety systems

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 186 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Tyre pressure Caution tyre malfunction appears. The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pres- sure in at least one of the tyres. G WARNING Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks: Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tyre traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all the tyres: Rat least every two weeks Rwhen the load changes Rbefore embarking on a longer journey Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving If necessary, correct the tyre pressure. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away. X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions for flat tyres. X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary. h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately one minute and then stays lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative appears. The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restarted after a wheel change. G WARNING If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the Run Flat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about a defective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, the driving characteristics and the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the Run Flat Indicator. X Restart tyre pressure monitor. The display message continues to be displayed. X Drive on carefully. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 179

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 187 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h Yellow warning lamp flashes for approximately 60 seconds and then stays lit. Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative wheel sensors missing appears. There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or more wheels. G WARNING Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The sys- tem is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors. X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. 180 Driving safety systems

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 188 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions J Red warning lamp is lit. ÷, ! Yellow warning lamps light up while the engine is running. Warning tone sounds. Colour display:Elec‐ tronics malfunction Stop See Owner's Manual appears. The following systems are malfunctioning: RABS (anti-lock braking system) RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) RCrosswind Assist RHill start assist Further driving systems could be switched off automatically. G WARNING The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due to malfunctioning driving safety systems. The brake system functions normally, but without the systems listed. The wheels could therefore lock up if you brake hard, for example. This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The brak- ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. D Yellow warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. Colour display: Steer‐ ing malfunction See Owner's Manual Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi- cult. G WARNING If the steering fluid level is too low, the power steering may fail. You will then need to use considerably more force to steer. There is a risk of an accident. Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and secure the vehicle using the parking brake. Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required to steer. Have the power steering checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. RIf you are able to steer safely, drive on carefully to a qualified specialist workshop. RIf you are not able to steer safely, do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. Driving safety systems 181

Practical advice. Z

Driver assistance systems

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 189 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · Red warning lamp is lit. Warning tone sounds. Forward collision warning detects obstacle on the road. X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and be ready to brake. · Red warning lamp is lit. Distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed. X Increase the distance. ^ Yellow warning lamp lights up while driving. Colour display: Dis‐ tance warning inop‐ erative or Electron‐ ics malfunction Visit workshop appears. The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty. X Clean the sensors. Environmental influences or error sources outside the system are temporarily interfering with the forward collision warning. Pos- sible causes: RHeavy rain or snow. ROperating temperature is too high. ROn-board voltage is too low. Forward collision warning is operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. Warning lamp remains lit. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the sensors. X Restart the engine. Warning lamp still remains lit. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ^ and C and other warning lamps are lit. Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. Do the following: X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ã flashes for approximately 3 seconds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display:Lane Keeping Assist inop‐ erative appears. Windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Clean the windscreen. 182 Driver assistance systems

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 190 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Environmental influences are interfering with Lane Keeping Assist. Possible causes: RHeavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibility. RThe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensor. RLane markings cannot be detected. Lane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when the causes listed no longer apply. If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, then the electronics are malfunctioning. System electronics are faulty. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¤ flashes for a max- imum of 5 seconds. Colour display:Ã green warning lamp flashes for a maximum of five seconds. Warning tone sounds. A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turn signal. X Stay inside the lane boundary markings. X Use indicator before changing lanes. ¯ flashes for approximately 10 seconds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: ¯ Cruise control inop‐ erative appears. Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ¯ flashes for approximately 10 seconds. C and other warning lamps are also lit. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Elec‐ tronics malfunction Visit workshop appears. Central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are mal- functioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer pos- sible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. È lights up. Speed display flashes. Warning tone sounds. Vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed. X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi- tions. Driver assistance systems 183

Practical advice. Z

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 191 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions È flashes for approximately 10 seconds. Warning tone sounds. Colour display: Lim‐ iter inoperative appears. Speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ò Warning lamp flashes for a minute or lights up continuously. Colour display:Black ice warning appears. The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a risk of black ice. X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather condi- tions. Battery, lights, heating Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Rear window heating or seat heating switches off automati- cally or cannot be switched on. Battery is not sufficiently charged. X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

Red warning lamp

lights up when the vehicle is ready to start. Warning tone sounds. Colour display:Stop See Owner's Manual appears. Possible causes: RAlternator is faulty. RBattery is faulty. RV-belt is torn. RElectronics are malfunctioning. X Do not continue driving. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off the engine. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display:# Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction Visit workshop appears. Battery monitoring is malfunctioning. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Monochrome dis- play:b Warning lamp lights up. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. X Switch off the engine. X Start the engine. 184 Battery, lights, heating

Practical advice.

Problem

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 192 · Applies to: 453

Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If, after that, the warning lamp is still lit up: Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after that, the warning lamp is still lit up: Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display:b Warning lamp lights up. Malfunction See Own‐ er's Manual appears. Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated. X Switch off the engine. X Restart the engine. If the message continues to be displayed: Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning. X Manually adjust exterior lighting. X Manually adjust windscreen wipers. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display:b Warning lamp lights up. Brake lamps inoper‐ ative appears. Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty. G WARNING Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps. The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road users when braking. X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Colour display:Switch off lights appears. Warning tone sounds. Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. X Turn control knob for the lights to à or u. Battery, lights, heating 185

Practical advice. Z

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 193 · Applies to: 453

Bluetooth® connection Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Bluetooth® connection cannot be established between the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and mobile phone. X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with the system. Information about compatible mobile phones: www.smart.com/connect X Check the security settings on your mobile phone. X Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobile phone. X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smart Media-System and on the mobile phone. The navigation system in the smart Media-System Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions No map is displayed in the navigation system. The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged. X Check to see that the SD card is inserted. Position of the vehicle in the navigation sys- tem does not match the vehicle's actual posi- tion. GPS symbol on the dis- play is grey or yellow. GPS reception is poor. X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception is better. The road's course in the navigation system no longer coincides with the actual road. The map data is out of date. X Update the map data. Navigation system does not display any traffic information. Route guidance has not been started. X Select a destination and start navigation. HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic has expired. X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are in or upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic. There are no naviga- tion messages during route guidance. The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date. X Check if route guidance has started. X If not, select a destination and start navigation. Navigation messages are switched off. X Switch on navigation messages. 186 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Practical advice.

Voice control system in the smart Media-System

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 194 · Applies to: 453

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The voice control sys- tem does not under- stand voice commands. Interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded. X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat. X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat. Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voice commands. X Avoid interfering noises. Voice commands have not been given clearly. X Say voice commands clearly. Voice command is unknown. X Say the command “Help”. A list of possible voice commands appears. smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 187

Practical advice. Z

Obtaining technical data

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 195 · Applies to: 453

Information on technical data:

www.smart.de

The technical data was determined in

accordance with EC Directives. All data

applies to the vehicle's standard equipment.

Differences will be present in the case of

vehicles with optional equipment. Further

information is available from any smart

Centre.

Reading out vehicle data

Useful information

The heights specified vary as a result of:

RTyres

RLoad

RCondition of the suspension

ROptional equipment

Optional equipment reduces the maximum

payload.

Only for certain countries: you can find vehi-

cle-specific vehicle data in the COC docu-

ments (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY).

These documents are delivered with your

vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate

Vehicle identification plate position

Vehicle identification plate ; Paint code = Vehicle manufacturer ? EU type approval number A Vehicle identification number (VIN) B Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight C Maximum permissible front axle load D Maximum permissible rear axle load i The data shown on the vehicle identifi- cation plate is example data. This data is different for every vehicle and can deviate from the data shown here. The data appli- cable to the vehicle is found on the vehi- cle's identification plate. Dimensions and weight Missing technical data was not available at the time of publication. Dimensions and weight (smart fortwo coupé) 188 Reading out vehicle data

Technical data.

Specifications

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 196 · Applies to: 453

Dimensions, weight and vol- umes Opening height : 1855 mm Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1555 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum boot load 75 kg Maximum tailgate load Tank capacity Total: 28.0 l Reserve: 5.0 l Specifications (BRABUS) Dimensions, weight and vol- umes Opening height : Vehicle length 2740 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1543 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum boot load Maximum tailgate load Tank capacity Total: 35.0 l Reserve: 5.0 l Dimensions and weight (smart fortwo cabrio) Specifications Dimensions, weight and vol- umes Vehicle length 2695 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1553 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum boot load 75 kg Maximum tailgate load without side bars Maximum tailgate load with sidebars Tank capacity Total: 28.0 l Reserve: 5.0 l Specifications (BRABUS) Dimensions, weight and vol- umes Vehicle length 2740 mm Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 1893 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1663 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors for vehicles equipped with wheel trims Vehicle height 1543 mm Wheelbase 1873 mm Maximum boot load Maximum tailgate load without side bars Reading out vehicle data 189

Technical data.

Specifications (BRABUS)

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 197 · Applies to: 453

Dimensions, weight and vol- umes Maximum tailgate load with sidebars Tank capacity Total: 35.0 l Reserve: 5.0 l Service products The following table lists all technical data for the service products of the vehicle. Fur- ther information on service products: http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smart centre. Service prod- ucts Specifications Fuel (Y page 67) Unleaded petrol, with at least 95 RON that conforms to the European standard EN 228, as an alternative: unleaded petrol with 91 RON/82 MON BRABUS: Super unleaded, with at least 98 ROZ/88 MOZ that conforms to the Euro- pean standard EN 228, as an alternative: unleaded petrol with 95 ROZ/85 MOZ Engine oil (Y page 133) 229.51, 229.53, as an alter- native: 229.1 and 229.3 or ACEA A3 Corrosion inhibitor/ antifreeze (Y page 134) Recommended: G40 Windscreen washer fluid (Y page 134) Temperatures above freezing point: mixing ratio of 1:100 MB SummerFit to water Temperatures below freezing point: for the cor- rect mixing ratio of MB WinterFit and water, please observe the infor- mation on the antifreeze container. Bulb types The following table lists the correct bulb types of the vehicle: Bulb Type Dipped-beam/main-beam headlamps H4 60/55 W Front foglamps H 16 Turn signals PY 21 W Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W Licence plate lighting W 5 W Interior lighting W 5 W Tail lamps Bulb Type Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W Rear foglamp P21 W Reversing lamp W 16 W Turn signals PY 21 W Fuse allocation 190 Fuse allocation

Technical data.

Consumer

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 198 · Applies to: 453

No . Consumer Cur- rent Col- our cod- ing 1 Starter motor 5 A Brow n 2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brow n 3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brow n 4 Airbag 5 A Brow n 5 Transmission control unit 25 A Cyan 6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red 7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue 8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red 10 Central control unit 20 A Yel- low 11 Central control unit 15 A Blue 12 Central control unit 10 A Red 13 Central control unit 15 A Blue 14 Power windows (auto- matic reversing fea- ture) 30 A Gree n 15 esp®, transmission control unit 5 A Brow n 16 Interior lighting 10 A Red 17 Immobiliser 3 A Vio- let 18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brow n 19 Brake lamps 10 A Red 20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue 21 Central control unit, fuel pump, injection 15 A Blue No . Consumer Cur- rent Col- our cod- ing 22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue 23 Only for eDrive: power supply control unit 40 A Oran ge 24 5 A Brow n 25 Power supply control unit 30 A Gree n 26 Radio 20 A Yel- low 27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brow n 28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue 29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brow n 30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue 31 Rear fog lamps ‑ ‑ 32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue 33 Tail lamps, front fog- lamps, hazard warning lamp button, locking button, headlamp range control, power windows, licence plate lighting, radio, control unit for air-condition- ing system, cruise control, limiter, park- ing aid button, pro- gram selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keeping Assist cam- era, automatic start/ stop system button 25 A Cyan 34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan Fuse allocation 191

Technical data.

Consumer

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 199 · Applies to: 453

No . Consumer Cur- rent Col- our cod- ing 36 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red 37 Right-hand dipped beam 10 A Red 38 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red 39 ‑ ‑ ‑ 40 ‑ ‑ ‑ 41 ‑ ‑ ‑ 42 ‑ ‑ ‑ 43 Exterior mirror heat- ing 5 A Brow n 44 Automatic reversing feature 25 A Cyan 45 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan 46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yel- low 47 ‑ ‑ ‑ 48 ‑ ‑ ‑ 49 ‑ ‑ ‑ Radio type approvals for the tyre pres- sure monitors Country Radio type approval number Argen- tina MW2433A H-12337 GG4 H-12338 Brazil 2770-12-8001 Model: MW2433A 0381-13-8001 Model: GG4 Country Radio type approval number Abu Dhabi Dubai TRA, Registered-NO ER0092100/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0099792/12 TRA, Registered-NO ER0076990/11 Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10 Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMS transmitter Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/114 Model: Gen Gamma Gen 4 433.92 MHz. Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2012/190 Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4 Type Approval Number: TRC/LPD/2011/158 Type Number: LPD Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012 MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012 MR6706 ANRT 2011 Moldova 1024 Philip- pines No: ESD-1206394C No: ESD-1306871C Serbia И 011 12 Singa- pore Compliance with IDA Standard DA- 103365 South Africa TA-2012/719 TA-2012/1540 TA-2011/1370 Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) G WARNING If RF transmitters are tampered with or not properly retrofitted, the electromagnetic radiation they emit can interfere with the vehicle electronics. This may jeopardise the operational safety of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. 192 Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters)

Technical data.

You should have all work on electrical and

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 200 · Applies to: 453

electronic components carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you operate RF transmitters incorrectly

in the vehicle, the electromagnetic radia-

tion could interfere with the vehicle elec-

tronics, e.g.:

Rif the RF transmitter is not connected to

an exterior aerial

Rthe exterior aerial has been fitted incor-

rectly or is not a low-reflection type

This could jeopardise the operating safety

of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit-

ted at a qualified specialist workshop.

When operating RF transmitters in the

vehicle, always connect them to the low-

reflection exterior aerial.

! Only have work carried out on the engine

electronics and its associated parts, such

as control units, sensors, actuating com-

ponents and connector leads, at a qualified

specialist workshop. Vehicle components

may otherwise wear more quickly and the

vehicle's operating permit may be invali-

dated.

! The operating permit may be invalidated

if the instructions for installation and use

of RF transmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditions

must be complied with:

Ronly approved wavebands may be used.

Robserve the maximum permissible out-

put in these wavebands.

Ronly approved aerial positions may be

used.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia-

tion can cause damage to health. The use of

an exterior aerial takes into consideration

the scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risk posed by electromag-

netic fields.

The following aerial positions may be used if

RF transmitters have been properly instal-

led:

Front roof area ; Rear roof area Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – EMC guidelines for instal- lation of aftermarket radio frequency trans- mitting equipment) when retrofitting RF (radio frequency) transmitters. Comply with the legal requirements for add-on parts. If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connections intended for use in the basic wiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's additional instructions during installation. Deviations with respect to wavebands, max- imum transmission outputs or aerial posi- tions must be approved by smart. The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the following values: Waveband Maximum transmission output Tetra 380 - 410 MHz 20 W Mobile communications generation 2G/3G/4G 6 W The following can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: RRF transmitters with a maximum trans- mission output of up to 100 mW RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the aerial on the outside of the vehicle for the following wavebands: RTetra RMobile communications (2G/3G/4G) Retrofitting two-way radios and mobile phones (RF transmitters) 193

Technical data. Z

Publication details

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 204 · Applies to: 453

Internet Further information about smart vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found on the following websites: http://www.smart.com http://www.daimler.com Editorial office You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding this Owner's Manual to the technical documen- tation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, 70546 Stuttgart, Germany ©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG. Vehicle manufacturer Daimler AG Mercedesstraße 137 70327 Stuttgart Germany As at 14.12.2015

É4535848905AËÍ

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 205 · Applies to: 453

4535848905 Order no. 6522 0175 02 Part no. 453 584 89 05 Edition ÄJ2016-1a www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand

Other ManualsLib Projects

Fortwo_Coupe_453_Owner_Manual_200p.pdf · p. 206 · Applies to: 453

www.manualslib.com www.manualslib.de www.manualslib.es www.manualslib.fr www.manualslib.nl www.manualslib.mx www.manualslib.tech 30+ Languages